https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&feedformat=atom&user=Carl.Ogden 2026-05-07T00:30:31Z User contributions MediaWiki 1.36.2 https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=623 2022-04-21T10:57:16Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Add an appointment */</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically, it will also be created in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment - &#039;&#039;When creating a Contact Appointment, please read Note 1 below&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> 1) When creating a Contact Appointment (by editing a contact, choose More Actions / Create Appointment), Notes are used to inform the contact about the appointment. We would advise if this was to be used to discuss mortgage or rental information, that you enter a detailed description making the contact fully aware of why they&#039;ve an appointment with your agency.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.<br /> <br /> Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=622 2022-04-21T10:56:44Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Add an appointment */</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically, it will also be created in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment - &#039;&#039;When creating a Contact Appointment, please read Note 1 below&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> 1) When creating a Contact Appointment (by editing a contact, choose More Actions / Create Appointment), Notes are used to inform the contact about the appointment. We would advise if this was to be used to discuss mortgage or rental information, that you enter a detailed description making the contact fully aware of why they&#039;ve an appointment with your agency.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.<br /> <br /> Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=621 2022-04-21T10:55:15Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Add an appointment */</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically, it will also be created in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment - see note 1 below<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> 1) When creating a Contact Appointment (by editing a contact, choose More Actions / Create Appointment), Notes are used to inform the contact about the appointment. We would advise if this was to be used to discuss mortgage or rental information, that you enter a detailed description making the contact fully aware of why they&#039;ve an appointment with your agency.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.<br /> <br /> Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=620 2022-04-21T08:25:31Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* More actions */</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers three options:<br /> <br /> Create appointment<br /> This option creates an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &quot;Contact appointment&quot;<br /> <br /> Create a task<br /> create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing<br /> create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=619 2022-04-21T08:25:18Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* More actions */</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:<br /> <br /> Create appointment<br /> This option creates an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &quot;Contact appointment&quot;<br /> <br /> Create a task<br /> create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing<br /> create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=618 2022-04-21T08:24:32Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* More actions */</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:<br /> <br /> Create appointment create an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &quot;Contact appointment&quot;<br /> <br /> Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=617 2022-04-21T07:31:59Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* More actions */</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:<br /> <br /> Create appointment create an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email.<br /> <br /> Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=616 2022-04-21T07:31:36Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* More actions */ added Create appointment in More actions</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:<br /> <br /> Create appointment create an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email.<br /> <br /> Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=585 2021-12-22T13:30:49Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                    For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=584 2021-12-22T13:30:37Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                    For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=583 2021-12-22T13:30:21Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                    For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=582 2021-12-22T13:29:15Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                    For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=581 2021-12-22T13:29:01Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                    For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=580 2021-12-22T13:28:37Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                   For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                         Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=579 2021-12-22T13:28:00Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Sitting Tenants */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=578 2021-12-22T12:42:48Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:PropertyBasics.png&diff=577 2021-12-22T12:42:04Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: </p> <hr /> <div>Basics</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=576 2021-12-22T12:39:59Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Sitting Tenants */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Sitting_Tenant.png&diff=575 2021-12-22T12:39:13Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: </p> <hr /> <div>Sitting Tenant</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=574 2021-12-22T12:37:12Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Property-Sitting-Tenants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=573 2021-12-22T12:36:16Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Basics */ added Sitting Tenant</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Property-Sitting-Tenants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Sitting Tenant Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=572 2021-12-21T16:45:26Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Sitting Tenants */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Property-Sitting-Tenants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=571 2021-12-21T16:44:41Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Sitting Tenants */</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> [[File:Property-Sitting-Tenants.png|thumb|Adding Sitting Tenants when selling a property]]<br /> <br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Property-Sitting-Tenants.png&diff=570 2021-12-21T16:43:37Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: </p> <hr /> <div>Adding a properties sitting tenants</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&diff=569 2021-12-21T16:42:18Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Owners */ added Sitting Tenants</p> <hr /> <div> <br /> <br /> = Properties =<br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.<br /> [[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To begin with, the following should be entered:<br /> <br /> Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.<br /> <br /> Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.<br /> <br /> Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).<br /> <br /> Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Address ==<br /> [[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]<br /> Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).<br /> <br /> === Display Address ===<br /> <br /> This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.<br /> <br /> ==== Latitude and Longitude ====<br /> [[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:<br /> <br /> Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. <br /> <br /> To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. <br /> <br /> If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button. <br /> <br /> Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.<br /> <br /> == Owners ==<br /> [[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.<br /> <br /> == Sitting Tenants ==<br /> Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.<br /> <br /> Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any appointment (created or updated).<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> [[File:PropBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.<br /> <br /> The basics are as follows:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contract                      For Sale / To Let / Auction<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> New build                    Yes or No<br /> <br /> Tenure                        Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer<br /> <br /> Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced<br /> <br />                                    *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove<br /> <br /> Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)<br /> <br /> Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property<br /> <br /> Reception rooms        number of Reception rooms in the property<br /> <br /> === To Let options ===<br /> [[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.<br /> <br /> Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.<br /> <br /> Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.<br /> <br /> == Commercial options ==<br /> [[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial type :       Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres<br /> <br /> <br /> Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)<br /> <br /> == Business Sales ==<br /> [[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.<br /> <br /> Business name            the name of the business<br /> <br /> Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.<br /> <br /> == Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==<br /> [[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc<br /> <br /> For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.<br /> <br /> == Price – To Let properties ==<br /> [[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.<br /> <br /> Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.<br /> <br /> Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.<br /> <br /> Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed<br /> <br /> Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Post Price Message     a message after the price<br /> <br /> Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> [[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.<br /> <br /> == Internal use ==<br /> [[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor Invoice ==<br /> [[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.<br /> <br /> <br /> Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice<br /> <br /> Amount                                   Amount of the invoice<br /> <br /> VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount<br /> <br /> Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.<br /> <br /> <br /> Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor<br /> <br /> Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.<br /> <br /> = Additional settings =<br /> <br /> <br /> These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> [[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> [[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&lt;sup&gt;st&lt;/sup&gt; floor / 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Floor (with lift)<br /> <br /> Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.<br /> <br /> Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply. Note: &#039;&#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> <br /> === Sale features ===<br /> [[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited<br /> <br /> Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> All other questions are simple Yes/No options<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> [[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)<br /> <br /> Council tax band       A – H<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> [[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.<br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> [[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.<br /> <br /> === Outside Area ===<br /> [[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> === Inside Area ===<br /> [[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.<br /> <br /> == Descriptions ==<br /> [[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.<br /> <br /> === Brief Description ===<br /> Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. <br /> <br /> === Full Description ===<br /> Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. <br /> <br /> Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Bullet points ===<br /> [[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.<br /> <br /> === Floors &amp; rooms ===<br /> [[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Room name                A required field and the general name of a room<br /> <br /> Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m<br /> <br /> Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters<br /> <br /> Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room<br /> <br /> Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word<br /> <br /> Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.<br /> <br /> Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below<br /> [[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.<br /> <br /> == Media ==<br /> [[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.<br /> <br /> An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.<br /> <br /> === Inserting a Video URL ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.<br /> <br /> Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.<br /> <br /> You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.<br /> <br /> === How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===<br /> 1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.<br /> <br /> 2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &quot;Sign In&quot; and enter your Google account information. <br /> <br /> 3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &quot;Upload video.&quot;<br /> <br /> 4. The video upload page should appear. Under &quot;Select files to upload,&quot; click &quot;Public&quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&#039;t go live until a later date. <br /> <br /> 5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. <br /> <br /> 6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. <br /> <br /> 7. Click &quot;Publish&quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&#039;t appear online unless you click &quot;Publish.&quot;<br /> <br /> Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> [[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.<br /> <br /> == Certificates ==<br /> Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.<br /> <br /> The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.<br /> <br /> == Advertising ==<br /> The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.<br /> <br /> === Portals ===<br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. <br /> [[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. <br /> <br /> For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.<br /> <br /> === Board requests ===<br /> [[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> If an advertising board is required for a property the &quot;Board Required&quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.<br /> <br /> === Hit statistics ===<br /> [[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.<br /> <br /> == Viewings / offers ==<br /> [[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.<br /> [[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).<br /> <br /> == Notes ==<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.<br /> <br /> == Files ==<br /> [[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.<br /> <br /> == Progress ==<br /> [[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.<br /> <br /> <br /> By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.<br /> <br /> <br /> Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.<br /> <br /> == Matches ==<br /> [[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.<br /> <br /> == Interested parties ==<br /> [[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.<br /> <br /> == Staff viewings ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.<br /> <br /> No viewings<br /> [[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings<br /> [[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> When there are viewings, the information returned will be:<br /> <br /> <br /> Date / Time of visit<br /> <br /> Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> [[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.<br /> <br /> == More actions ==<br /> [[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation<br /> <br /> Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status<br /> <br /> Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment<br /> <br /> Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff<br /> <br /> Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)<br /> <br /> Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment<br /> <br /> Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts<br /> <br /> Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property<br /> <br /> Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics<br /> <br /> Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor<br /> <br /> Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact<br /> <br /> Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements<br /> <br /> Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement<br /> <br /> Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&diff=568 2021-12-07T15:45:24Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Contact Information */</p> <hr /> <div><br /> == Agency configuration ==<br /> [[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Agency =====<br /> Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system<br /> <br /> ===== Year start =====<br /> Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts<br /> <br /> Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts<br /> <br /> Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.<br /> <br /> == Email server configuration ==<br /> To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.<br /> [[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider<br /> <br /> <br /> The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.<br /> <br /> Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.<br /> <br /> <br /> The options are:<br /> <br /> <br /> Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server<br /> <br /> Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)<br /> <br /> Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)<br /> <br /> Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None<br /> <br /> Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)<br /> <br /> Password                                Password for the account<br /> <br /> From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)<br /> <br /> From address                          Email address of the account<br /> <br /> Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)<br /> <br /> == Email branding ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.<br /> <br /> == Status Overrides ==<br /> [[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.<br /> <br /> == Privacy ==<br /> Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.<br /> <br /> === Telephone privacy statement ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out<br /> <br /> <br /> Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.<br /> <br /> An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.<br /> <br /> <br /> However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.<br /> <br /> === Data retention limits ===<br /> <br /> ==== Vendors ====<br /> <br /> ==== Buyer ====<br /> <br /> ==== Landlords ====<br /> <br /> ==== Tenants ====<br /> <br /> ==== Staff ====<br /> <br /> <br /> == Marketing ==<br /> <br /> ==== MailChimp Key ====<br /> To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.<br /> <br /> ==== MailChimp Lists ====<br /> <br /> <br /> An example of how lists are shown can be seen:<br /> <br /> <br /> == File storage ==<br /> [[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.<br /> <br /> ===== &#039;&#039;&#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&#039;&#039;&#039; =====<br /> The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.<br /> <br /> Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.<br /> <br /> == Invoices – currently unavailable ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.<br /> <br /> == Tawk to API ==<br /> [[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.<br /> <br /> When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.<br /> <br /> Note:<br /> You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.<br /> == Branches ==<br /> <br /> By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.<br /> [[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Adding a branch<br /> <br /> To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.<br /> <br /> === Edit Branch ===<br /> To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.<br /> [[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact Information ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Branch Name              the name of this Branch<br /> <br /> Postcode                     the postcode of this branch<br /> <br /> Address                       the full address of the branch<br /> <br /> Country                       the country where the branch resides<br /> <br /> Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch<br /> <br /> Fax Number                the fax number of the branch<br /> <br /> Email address              the main email used for this branch<br /> <br /> Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)<br /> <br /> Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)<br /> <br /> Set map move your branch latitude/longitude if does not display correctly<br /> <br /> Comp. Reg. No. the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch<br /> <br /> Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency<br /> <br /> ==== Managers ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Default rooms ====<br /> To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.<br /> <br /> ==== Settings ====<br /> <br /> ===== Branch services =====<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties<br /> <br /> Rentals            this branch caters for Rental properties<br /> <br /> Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties<br /> <br /> Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes<br /> <br /> Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes<br /> <br /> Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales<br /> <br /> <br /> ===== Default local council =====<br /> This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.<br /> <br /> ===== Properties =====<br /> <br /> <br /> Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.<br /> <br /> <br /> Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.<br /> <br /> <br /> Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.<br /> <br /> <br /> Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.<br /> <br /> <br /> Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.<br /> <br /> ===== Diary =====<br /> <br /> <br /> Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.<br /> <br /> ===== Fees =====<br /> Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)<br /> <br /> Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)<br /> <br /> Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)<br /> <br /> Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)<br /> <br /> Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)<br /> <br /> Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied<br /> <br />            On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically<br /> <br />            On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised<br /> <br /> ===== Currency =====<br /> An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD<br /> <br /> ===== Letters =====<br /> When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.<br /> <br /> ===== Language =====<br /> Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Tax ====<br /> When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.<br /> <br /> ==== Rental ====<br /> Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.<br /> <br /> This will be displayed on your website and to portals.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== SMS ====<br /> [[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.<br /> <br /> ==== Advertising board request ====<br /> Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express<br /> <br /> ===== Agency Express =====<br /> [[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.<br /> <br /> ==== Standard Email Board Company ====<br /> [[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Board company contact details =====<br /> <br /> Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.<br /> <br /> <br /> Sale statuses<br /> <br /> When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.<br /> <br /> ===== Letting statuses =====<br /> When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.<br /> <br /> ===== Board removal =====<br /> When a board should be removed (after x days).<br /> <br /> ==== Applicable countries ====<br /> [[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Affiliates ===<br /> Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.<br /> <br /> === Proactive Actions ===<br /> Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Creating a new action&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable/Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Class&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Type&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Sales/Lettings&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Status&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;At status change/After status change&#039;&#039;&#039; - &quot;At status change&quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &quot;After status change&quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &quot;Contact day&quot; you will NOT be able to choose &quot;Immediately&quot;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Specific status&#039;&#039;&#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Method&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> 6 methods are currently available: &#039;Create a task&#039;, &#039;Diarise telephone call&#039;, &#039;Diarise send email&#039;, &#039;Diarise send SMS&#039;, &#039;Email (automated)&#039;, &#039;Email (staff member)&#039;, &#039;SMS (automated)&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact day&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &quot;After status change&quot; is chosen.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact time&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Staff member&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Send to&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Task name&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Subject&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Body&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-<br /> <br /> Current variables are<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {RE} - The Display Address for the property<br /> <br /> {REF} - The property reference<br /> <br /> {ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Vendor variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title<br /> <br /> {VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number<br /> <br /> {VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {VendorEmail} - The vendors email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Landlord Variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title<br /> <br /> {LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number<br /> <br /> {LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number<br /> <br /> {LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Buyer variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title<br /> <br /> {BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number<br /> <br /> {BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Tenant variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title<br /> <br /> {TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number<br /> <br /> {TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {TenantEmail} - The tenants email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Staff variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property<br /> <br /> {AgencyName} - The agency name<br /> <br /> {OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch<br /> <br /> {OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch<br /> <br /> {OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Formatting variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {b} - Start to bold text<br /> <br /> {/b} - End of the bold text<br /> <br /> {u} - Start to underline text<br /> <br /> {/u} - End of the underline text<br /> <br /> {i} - Start to italic text<br /> <br /> {/i} - End of the italic text<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete action&#039;&#039;&#039; - allows for you to delete the action<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039; - cancel editing the action<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Create/Update action&#039;&#039;&#039; - creates or updates the action<br /> <br /> Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Money laundering provider ===<br /> <br /> There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.<br /> <br /> ==== Landmark AML ====<br /> [[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].<br /> <br /> Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.<br /> == Staff ==<br /> [[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.<br /> <br /> Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.<br /> [[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.<br /> === Add / Edit a member of staff ===<br /> [[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.<br /> <br /> === Permissions ===<br /> [[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]<br /> [[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> [[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. <br /> <br /> The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.<br /> <br /> When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.<br /> <br /> === Email Preferences ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.<br /> <br /> === Email access ===<br /> Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> <br /> === History ===<br /> Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.<br /> === Login locations ===<br /> When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.<br /> <br /> ===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab<br /> <br /> <br /> Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.<br /> ===Configuration Warning===<br /> <br /> <br /> If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:<br /> <br /> To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.<br /> ===Staff Configuration===<br /> Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.<br /> <br /> <br /> Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Teams ==<br /> [[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.<br /> By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.<br /> <br /> To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.<br /> <br /> To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.<br /> <br /> == Feeds ==<br /> [[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Editing Feeds ==<br /> There are two types of outbound data feed :-<br /> <br /> Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.<br /> <br /> All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-<br /> [[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-<br /> [[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.<br /> <br /> The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.<br /> <br /> Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.<br /> <br /> The feed will automatically start. <br /> <br /> The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.<br /> <br /> All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.<br /> <br /> == Security ==<br /> This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.<br /> [[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)<br /> <br /> IP formatting:<br /> <br /> IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255<br /> <br /> IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001<br /> <br /> == Property features ==<br /> [[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.<br /> <br /> For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &#039;Canal Mooring&#039;<br /> <br /> == Property Progression ==<br /> <br /> == Add marker ==<br /> This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.<br /> <br /> Default Residential Sales<br /> <br /> Default Residential Lettings<br /> <br /> Default Commercial Sales<br /> <br /> Default Commercial Lettings<br /> <br /> Default Business Sales<br /> <br /> == Contact Sources ==<br /> Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.<br /> <br /> == Brochure Templates ==<br /> By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.<br /> <br /> <br /> To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.<br /> <br /> === Editing a brochure ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure<br /> <br /> Document description            a full description of the brochure<br /> <br /> <br /> For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click<br /> <br /> Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.<br /> <br /> == Letter templates ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.<br /> <br /> <br /> When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.<br /> <br /> Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.<br /> <br /> <br /> Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”<br /> <br /> === Edit letter ===<br /> <br /> === Copy settings ===<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.<br /> <br /> <br /> Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.<br /> <br /> ==== Page ====<br /> These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.<br /> <br /> ==== Header ====<br /> This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.<br /> <br /> ==== Footer ====<br /> This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.<br /> <br /> ==== Letter content ====<br /> <br /> <br /> This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.<br /> <br /> Design Help<br /> <br /> If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).<br /> <br /> === Agency files ===<br /> Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.<br /> <br /> == Email templates ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.<br /> <br /> === Editing Email ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Document name                     the name of the email<br /> <br /> Document description            a detailed description of the email<br /> <br /> Template Code                       the wording of your email<br /> <br /> <br /> Show merge fields<br /> <br /> Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> Delete                                     Delete this template<br /> <br /> Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates<br /> <br /> Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates<br /> <br /> == Diary categories ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.<br /> <br /> == Match location updater ==<br /> [[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.<br /> <br /> === Proposing a new location ===<br /> [[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.<br /> <br /> Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.<br /> <br /> == Landmark Agency Configuration ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration<br /> [[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You need to input the following:<br /> <br /> <br /> API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key<br /> <br /> Account ID<br /> <br /> Client ID<br /> <br /> Client Secret<br /> <br /> <br /> Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.<br /> <br /> <br /> You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&diff=567 2021-12-07T15:43:48Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Contact Information */ added Company Reg Number</p> <hr /> <div><br /> == Agency configuration ==<br /> [[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Agency =====<br /> Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system<br /> <br /> ===== Year start =====<br /> Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts<br /> <br /> Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts<br /> <br /> Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.<br /> <br /> == Email server configuration ==<br /> To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.<br /> [[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider<br /> <br /> <br /> The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.<br /> <br /> Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.<br /> <br /> <br /> The options are:<br /> <br /> <br /> Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server<br /> <br /> Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)<br /> <br /> Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)<br /> <br /> Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None<br /> <br /> Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)<br /> <br /> Password                                Password for the account<br /> <br /> From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)<br /> <br /> From address                          Email address of the account<br /> <br /> Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)<br /> <br /> == Email branding ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.<br /> <br /> == Status Overrides ==<br /> [[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.<br /> <br /> == Privacy ==<br /> Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.<br /> <br /> === Telephone privacy statement ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out<br /> <br /> <br /> Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.<br /> <br /> An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.<br /> <br /> <br /> However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.<br /> <br /> === Data retention limits ===<br /> <br /> ==== Vendors ====<br /> <br /> ==== Buyer ====<br /> <br /> ==== Landlords ====<br /> <br /> ==== Tenants ====<br /> <br /> ==== Staff ====<br /> <br /> <br /> == Marketing ==<br /> <br /> ==== MailChimp Key ====<br /> To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.<br /> <br /> ==== MailChimp Lists ====<br /> <br /> <br /> An example of how lists are shown can be seen:<br /> <br /> <br /> == File storage ==<br /> [[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.<br /> <br /> ===== &#039;&#039;&#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&#039;&#039;&#039; =====<br /> The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.<br /> <br /> Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.<br /> <br /> == Invoices – currently unavailable ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.<br /> <br /> == Tawk to API ==<br /> [[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.<br /> <br /> When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.<br /> <br /> Note:<br /> You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.<br /> == Branches ==<br /> <br /> By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.<br /> [[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Adding a branch<br /> <br /> To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.<br /> <br /> === Edit Branch ===<br /> To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.<br /> [[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact Information ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Branch Name              the name of this Branch<br /> <br /> Postcode                     the postcode of this branch<br /> <br /> Address                       the full address of the branch<br /> <br /> Country                       the country where the branch resides<br /> <br /> Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch<br /> <br /> Fax Number                the fax number of the branch<br /> <br /> Email address              the main email used for this branch<br /> <br /> Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)<br /> <br /> Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)<br /> <br /> Comp. Reg. No. the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch<br /> <br /> Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency<br /> <br /> ==== Managers ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Default rooms ====<br /> To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.<br /> <br /> ==== Settings ====<br /> <br /> ===== Branch services =====<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties<br /> <br /> Rentals            this branch caters for Rental properties<br /> <br /> Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties<br /> <br /> Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes<br /> <br /> Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes<br /> <br /> Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales<br /> <br /> <br /> ===== Default local council =====<br /> This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.<br /> <br /> ===== Properties =====<br /> <br /> <br /> Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.<br /> <br /> <br /> Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.<br /> <br /> <br /> Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.<br /> <br /> <br /> Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.<br /> <br /> <br /> Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.<br /> <br /> ===== Diary =====<br /> <br /> <br /> Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.<br /> <br /> ===== Fees =====<br /> Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)<br /> <br /> Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)<br /> <br /> Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)<br /> <br /> Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)<br /> <br /> Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)<br /> <br /> Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied<br /> <br />            On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically<br /> <br />            On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised<br /> <br /> ===== Currency =====<br /> An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD<br /> <br /> ===== Letters =====<br /> When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.<br /> <br /> ===== Language =====<br /> Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Tax ====<br /> When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.<br /> <br /> ==== Rental ====<br /> Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.<br /> <br /> This will be displayed on your website and to portals.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== SMS ====<br /> [[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.<br /> <br /> ==== Advertising board request ====<br /> Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express<br /> <br /> ===== Agency Express =====<br /> [[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.<br /> <br /> ==== Standard Email Board Company ====<br /> [[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Board company contact details =====<br /> <br /> Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.<br /> <br /> <br /> Sale statuses<br /> <br /> When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.<br /> <br /> ===== Letting statuses =====<br /> When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.<br /> <br /> ===== Board removal =====<br /> When a board should be removed (after x days).<br /> <br /> ==== Applicable countries ====<br /> [[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Affiliates ===<br /> Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.<br /> <br /> === Proactive Actions ===<br /> Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Creating a new action&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable/Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Class&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Type&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Sales/Lettings&#039;&#039;&#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property Status&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;At status change/After status change&#039;&#039;&#039; - &quot;At status change&quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &quot;After status change&quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &quot;Contact day&quot; you will NOT be able to choose &quot;Immediately&quot;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Specific status&#039;&#039;&#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact Method&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> 6 methods are currently available: &#039;Create a task&#039;, &#039;Diarise telephone call&#039;, &#039;Diarise send email&#039;, &#039;Diarise send SMS&#039;, &#039;Email (automated)&#039;, &#039;Email (staff member)&#039;, &#039;SMS (automated)&#039;<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact day&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &quot;After status change&quot; is chosen.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact time&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Staff member&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Send to&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Task name&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Subject&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Body&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-<br /> <br /> Current variables are<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Property variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {RE} - The Display Address for the property<br /> <br /> {REF} - The property reference<br /> <br /> {ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Vendor variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title<br /> <br /> {VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor<br /> <br /> {VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number<br /> <br /> {VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {VendorEmail} - The vendors email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Landlord Variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title<br /> <br /> {LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord<br /> <br /> {LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number<br /> <br /> {LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number<br /> <br /> {LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Buyer variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title<br /> <br /> {BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer<br /> <br /> {BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number<br /> <br /> {BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Tenant variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title<br /> <br /> {TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant<br /> <br /> {TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number<br /> <br /> {TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number<br /> <br /> {TenantEmail} - The tenants email address<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Staff variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property<br /> <br /> {AgencyName} - The agency name<br /> <br /> {OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch<br /> <br /> {OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch<br /> <br /> {OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Formatting variables&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> {b} - Start to bold text<br /> <br /> {/b} - End of the bold text<br /> <br /> {u} - Start to underline text<br /> <br /> {/u} - End of the underline text<br /> <br /> {i} - Start to italic text<br /> <br /> {/i} - End of the italic text<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete action&#039;&#039;&#039; - allows for you to delete the action<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039; - cancel editing the action<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Create/Update action&#039;&#039;&#039; - creates or updates the action<br /> <br /> Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Money laundering provider ===<br /> <br /> There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.<br /> <br /> ==== Landmark AML ====<br /> [[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].<br /> <br /> Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.<br /> == Staff ==<br /> [[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.<br /> <br /> Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.<br /> [[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.<br /> === Add / Edit a member of staff ===<br /> [[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.<br /> <br /> === Permissions ===<br /> [[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]<br /> [[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> [[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. <br /> <br /> The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.<br /> <br /> When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.<br /> <br /> === Email Preferences ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.<br /> <br /> === Email access ===<br /> Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> <br /> === History ===<br /> Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.<br /> === Login locations ===<br /> When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.<br /> <br /> ===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab<br /> <br /> <br /> Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.<br /> ===Configuration Warning===<br /> <br /> <br /> If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:<br /> <br /> To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.<br /> ===Staff Configuration===<br /> Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.<br /> <br /> <br /> Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Teams ==<br /> [[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.<br /> By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.<br /> <br /> To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.<br /> <br /> To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.<br /> <br /> == Feeds ==<br /> [[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Editing Feeds ==<br /> There are two types of outbound data feed :-<br /> <br /> Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.<br /> <br /> All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-<br /> [[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-<br /> [[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.<br /> <br /> The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.<br /> <br /> Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.<br /> <br /> The feed will automatically start. <br /> <br /> The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.<br /> <br /> All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.<br /> <br /> == Security ==<br /> This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.<br /> [[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)<br /> <br /> IP formatting:<br /> <br /> IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255<br /> <br /> IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001<br /> <br /> == Property features ==<br /> [[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.<br /> <br /> For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &#039;Canal Mooring&#039;<br /> <br /> == Property Progression ==<br /> <br /> == Add marker ==<br /> This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.<br /> <br /> Default Residential Sales<br /> <br /> Default Residential Lettings<br /> <br /> Default Commercial Sales<br /> <br /> Default Commercial Lettings<br /> <br /> Default Business Sales<br /> <br /> == Contact Sources ==<br /> Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.<br /> <br /> == Brochure Templates ==<br /> By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.<br /> <br /> <br /> To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.<br /> <br /> === Editing a brochure ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure<br /> <br /> Document description            a full description of the brochure<br /> <br /> <br /> For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click<br /> <br /> Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.<br /> <br /> == Letter templates ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.<br /> <br /> <br /> When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.<br /> <br /> Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.<br /> <br /> <br /> Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”<br /> <br /> === Edit letter ===<br /> <br /> === Copy settings ===<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.<br /> <br /> <br /> Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.<br /> <br /> ==== Page ====<br /> These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.<br /> <br /> ==== Header ====<br /> This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.<br /> <br /> ==== Footer ====<br /> This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.<br /> <br /> ==== Letter content ====<br /> <br /> <br /> This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.<br /> <br /> Design Help<br /> <br /> If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).<br /> <br /> === Agency files ===<br /> Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.<br /> <br /> == Email templates ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.<br /> <br /> === Editing Email ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Document name                     the name of the email<br /> <br /> Document description            a detailed description of the email<br /> <br /> Template Code                       the wording of your email<br /> <br /> <br /> Show merge fields<br /> <br /> Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> Delete                                     Delete this template<br /> <br /> Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates<br /> <br /> Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates<br /> <br /> == Diary categories ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.<br /> <br /> == Match location updater ==<br /> [[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.<br /> <br /> === Proposing a new location ===<br /> [[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.<br /> <br /> Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.<br /> <br /> == Landmark Agency Configuration ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration<br /> [[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You need to input the following:<br /> <br /> <br /> API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key<br /> <br /> Account ID<br /> <br /> Client ID<br /> <br /> Client Secret<br /> <br /> <br /> Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.<br /> <br /> <br /> You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&diff=566 2021-12-07T15:34:42Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Rental agreements */ added info regarding tenancy statement report</p> <hr /> <div>= Contacts =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.<br /> <br /> Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-<br /> <br /> Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor<br /> <br /> A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. <br /> <br /> Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:<br /> = Contact Details =<br /> <br /> == Adding a new contact ==<br /> When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)<br /> <br /> You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> === Basic details ===<br /> <br /> The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.<br /> [[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Contact type ====<br /> [[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> A contact MUST have at least one option selected:<br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Contact Type<br /> !<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |Applicant / Tenant<br /> |Someone looking to buy or rent a property.<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality<br /> |-<br /> |Purchaser<br /> |Someone looking to buy a property<br /> |Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear<br /> |-<br /> |Vendor<br /> |Someone looking to market their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Someone looking to rent out their property with you<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Solicitor<br /> |A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using<br /> |<br /> |-<br /> |Contractor<br /> |A contractor that undertakes repairs<br /> |<br /> |}<br /> If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type then select as many as required.<br /> [[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Contact information ====<br /> This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> A note one email address&#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma<br /> <br />                                                Example - me@me.com, you@you.com<br /> <br /> === Heat Rating ===<br /> <br /> <br /> This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &#039;heat&#039;. Think of an old fashioned Hot Box<br /> <br /> This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &#039;Hot Contact&#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.<br /> [[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> === Address ===<br /> <br /> ==== Basic Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.<br /> <br /> <br /> Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description<br /> <br /> Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned<br /> <br /> Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address<br /> <br /> Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)<br /> <br /> ==== Solicitor Address Details ====<br /> [[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also increase data inputting)<br /> <br /> <br /> All other information is then entered as the above section.<br /> <br /> ==== Staff notes and information ====<br /> [[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.<br /> <br /> = Anti Money Laundering =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.<br /> <br /> There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. <br /> <br /> The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.<br /> <br /> The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.<br /> <br /> == Current ID details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.<br /> <br /> Documents listed by default are:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender<br /> <br />            A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)<br /> <br />            Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address<br /> <br />            Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit<br /> <br />            Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address<br /> <br />            Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name<br /> <br />            EEA member state identity card<br /> <br />            House or motor insurance certificate<br /> <br />            Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand<br /> <br />            Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement<br /> <br />            Local council tax bill for the current year<br /> <br />            Record of home visit<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Person&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />            Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits<br /> <br />            Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank<br /> <br />            Current full UK driving licence (new style only)<br /> <br />            Current Passport<br /> <br />            Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence<br /> <br />            EE member state identity card<br /> <br />            Firearms or shotgun certificates<br /> <br />            National identity card containing photograph of the client<br /> <br />            Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4<br /> <br />            Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport<br /> <br />            Identification reference (required)<br /> <br /> Record the identification reference of the document being presented<br /> <br /> <br /> Date Produced and photocopied (required)<br /> Date on ID (required)<br /> Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this<br /> <br /> == Right to rent ==<br /> [[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.<br /> <br /> = Requirements =<br /> The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.<br /> <br /> === Match requirements ===<br /> The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. <br /> <br /> To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. <br /> <br /> Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button<br /> [[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> An explanation of each field is given below :-<br /> <br /> Match name               a unique name for this requirement<br /> <br /> Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas<br /> <br /> Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at<br /> <br /> New build only            if they are interested in new build only<br /> <br /> Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business<br /> <br /> Contract type              For Sale / To Let<br /> <br /> Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land<br /> <br /> Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village<br /> <br /> Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)<br /> <br /> Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for<br /> <br /> Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at<br /> <br /> Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available<br /> <br /> == Live matches ==<br /> The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.<br /> <br /> == Previously matched ==<br /> When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.<br /> <br /> If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)<br /> <br /> = Files =<br /> [[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. <br /> <br /> This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Notes =<br /> [[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.<br /> <br /> = Viewings / Offers =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.<br /> <br /> = Rental agreements =<br /> <br /> <br /> If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.<br /> <br /> = Communications =<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.<br /> <br /> = Marketing / Privacy =<br /> <br /> == Mailchimp ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Please note&#039;&#039;&#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.<br /> <br /> == GDPR consent ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.<br /> <br /> As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.<br /> <br /> = History =<br /> The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating. <br /> <br /> This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.<br /> <br /> = My Properties =<br /> The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.<br /> <br /> == Linked properties ==<br /> [[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Purchasing Properties ==<br /> [[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.<br /> <br /> <br /> NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.<br /> <br /> == Quick Searching Solicitors ==<br /> <br /> <br /> As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.<br /> <br /> <br /> Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).<br /> <br /> Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria<br /> [[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.<br /> <br /> = Invoices =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:<br /> <br /> Mark as Paid<br /> <br /> Print invoice<br /> <br /> Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> = Solicitors – Solicitor details =<br /> [[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.<br /> <br /> = More actions =<br /> <br /> <br /> The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:<br /> <br /> Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact<br /> <br /> Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Profile_Configuration&diff=565 2021-12-02T15:31:32Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Receiving daily briefing settings */ changed hours</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Profile =<br /> The staff configuration allows each staff member to set their own environment up within Standout. Also, if the agency uses Standout for requesting and monitoring holidays, this section will allow days off to be tracked.<br /> <br /> == Available sections ==<br /> [[File:ProfileTabs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Account Details           basic account information for the staff member<br /> <br /> Dashboard options      Disable and Enable Dashboard components and limit recent items<br /> <br /> Holidays                      allow staff to monitor and request holiday requests<br /> <br /> Staff profile                 if your website has been created by ISSL and have individual staff member profiles, this section will allow information to be amended when displayed on the agents website.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email preferences       allows the configuration of the Daily Briefing email and a signature when sending emails from Standout<br /> <br /> Daily email                  if enabled, displays a copy of the latest daily email<br /> <br /> Email linking                allows Standout to operate directly with an email address (such as Gmail/Outlook etc)<br /> <br /> History                         show the record events of task undertaken within Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Account Details ==<br /> [[File:ProfileAccount.png|none|thumb|602x602px]]<br /> <br /> === Main details ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Username                   the name used to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Password                    the password entered to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Title                             choose the correct title<br /> <br /> First name                   should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Surname                     should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Direct telephone         best number to be contacted on<br /> <br /> Email address              email address for the staff member<br /> <br /> Reply to                       either the staff member or branch email<br /> <br /> Job title                       if a specific title is required<br /> <br /> Qualifications              professional qualifications<br /> <br /> === New Property Walkthrough ===<br /> <br /> <br /> New property walkthrough is a new feather which allows an alternative way to enter properties. Based on a question/answer entry system, allowing new users to simply enter properties until familiar with the main property details. This can be used or not used.<br /> <br /> === Colour scheme ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Colour scheme            allows a choice of Light or Dark<br /> <br /> === Two-factor authentication ===<br /> <br /> <br /> You can add an extra layer of security to your Standout Property Manager account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA). This requires you to have access to your phone when you log in, and means even if your password is compromised or stolen, only you can log in to your account.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More information to start this procedure.<br /> <br /> === Work days ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configure which days the staff member works<br /> <br /> === Teams I belong to ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shows any teams that have been created in Administration/Teams<br /> <br /> == Dashboard options ==<br /> [[File:ProfileDashboardOptions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Local weather                         choose to have the next 7 days weather shown on the dashboard<br /> <br /> Show Today                            choose to show Today’s Appointments and Tasks<br /> <br /> Show Performance Chart       choose to show the Performance Chart<br /> <br /> Recent properties                   choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited properties<br /> <br /> Recent Contacts                      choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited contacts<br /> <br /> <br /> == Holidays ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The holiday entitlement is set in Administration/Staff and allows staff members to be then able to request holidays. A manager or other authorised staff member should then Authorise or Decline a request.<br /> [[File:ProfileHolidays.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Staff profile ==<br /> [[File:ProfileWebProfile.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff profile enabled               place a tick to enable<br /> <br /> Biography                                biography of the staff member<br /> <br /> Photo                                      upload a photo of the staff member<br /> <br /> == Email preferences ==<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailPreferences.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> == Receiving daily briefing settings ==<br /> You can choose from the following options about your daily briefing email:<br /> <br /> * Disabled - do not receive the daily email<br /> * 6am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 7am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 8am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 9am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 10am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> *11am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> *12pm - receive the daily email around this time<br /> By enabling or disabling the following options, these will be shown in the daily briefing email<br /> <br /> * Tip of the day<br /> * Appointments for your team<br /> * Office awaiting viewing feedback<br /> * Viewings requiring feedback<br /> * No viewings<br /> * Property changes<br /> * New applicants<br /> * Potential vendors<br /> * New properties<br /> <br /> === Receiving emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to define the sections included if Receive Daily Briefing email.<br /> <br /> === Sending Emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to create an email signature when sending emails from Standout.<br /> <br /> == Email linking ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Entering your email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailLink.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You should be able to obtain the email details from your own Email service provider, unfortunately, the Support team at Standout will not be able to assist with this configuration as that information will be unable to us.<br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> <br /> <br /> History will display any log information stored against a staff member, system events can be removed to reduce the amount of information shown on screen.<br /> [[File:ProfileHistory.png|none|thumb|418x418px]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Profile_Configuration&diff=564 2021-12-02T15:30:57Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Email preferences */</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Profile =<br /> The staff configuration allows each staff member to set their own environment up within Standout. Also, if the agency uses Standout for requesting and monitoring holidays, this section will allow days off to be tracked.<br /> <br /> == Available sections ==<br /> [[File:ProfileTabs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Account Details           basic account information for the staff member<br /> <br /> Dashboard options      Disable and Enable Dashboard components and limit recent items<br /> <br /> Holidays                      allow staff to monitor and request holiday requests<br /> <br /> Staff profile                 if your website has been created by ISSL and have individual staff member profiles, this section will allow information to be amended when displayed on the agents website.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email preferences       allows the configuration of the Daily Briefing email and a signature when sending emails from Standout<br /> <br /> Daily email                  if enabled, displays a copy of the latest daily email<br /> <br /> Email linking                allows Standout to operate directly with an email address (such as Gmail/Outlook etc)<br /> <br /> History                         show the record events of task undertaken within Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Account Details ==<br /> [[File:ProfileAccount.png|none|thumb|602x602px]]<br /> <br /> === Main details ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Username                   the name used to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Password                    the password entered to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Title                             choose the correct title<br /> <br /> First name                   should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Surname                     should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Direct telephone         best number to be contacted on<br /> <br /> Email address              email address for the staff member<br /> <br /> Reply to                       either the staff member or branch email<br /> <br /> Job title                       if a specific title is required<br /> <br /> Qualifications              professional qualifications<br /> <br /> === New Property Walkthrough ===<br /> <br /> <br /> New property walkthrough is a new feather which allows an alternative way to enter properties. Based on a question/answer entry system, allowing new users to simply enter properties until familiar with the main property details. This can be used or not used.<br /> <br /> === Colour scheme ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Colour scheme            allows a choice of Light or Dark<br /> <br /> === Two-factor authentication ===<br /> <br /> <br /> You can add an extra layer of security to your Standout Property Manager account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA). This requires you to have access to your phone when you log in, and means even if your password is compromised or stolen, only you can log in to your account.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More information to start this procedure.<br /> <br /> === Work days ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configure which days the staff member works<br /> <br /> === Teams I belong to ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shows any teams that have been created in Administration/Teams<br /> <br /> == Dashboard options ==<br /> [[File:ProfileDashboardOptions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Local weather                         choose to have the next 7 days weather shown on the dashboard<br /> <br /> Show Today                            choose to show Today’s Appointments and Tasks<br /> <br /> Show Performance Chart       choose to show the Performance Chart<br /> <br /> Recent properties                   choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited properties<br /> <br /> Recent Contacts                      choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited contacts<br /> <br /> <br /> == Holidays ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The holiday entitlement is set in Administration/Staff and allows staff members to be then able to request holidays. A manager or other authorised staff member should then Authorise or Decline a request.<br /> [[File:ProfileHolidays.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Staff profile ==<br /> [[File:ProfileWebProfile.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff profile enabled               place a tick to enable<br /> <br /> Biography                                biography of the staff member<br /> <br /> Photo                                      upload a photo of the staff member<br /> <br /> == Email preferences ==<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailPreferences.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> == Receiving daily briefing settings ==<br /> You can choose from the following options about your daily briefing email:<br /> <br /> * Disabled - do not receive the daily email<br /> * Enabled - receive the daily email at the default time<br /> * 5am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 6am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 7am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 8am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 9am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 10am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> By enabling or disabling the following options, these will be shown in the daily briefing email<br /> <br /> * Tip of the day<br /> * Appointments for your team<br /> * Office awaiting viewing feedback<br /> * Viewings requiring feedback<br /> * No viewings<br /> * Property changes<br /> * New applicants<br /> * Potential vendors<br /> * New properties<br /> <br /> === Receiving emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to define the sections included if Receive Daily Briefing email.<br /> <br /> === Sending Emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to create an email signature when sending emails from Standout.<br /> <br /> == Email linking ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Entering your email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailLink.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You should be able to obtain the email details from your own Email service provider, unfortunately, the Support team at Standout will not be able to assist with this configuration as that information will be unable to us.<br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> <br /> <br /> History will display any log information stored against a staff member, system events can be removed to reduce the amount of information shown on screen.<br /> [[File:ProfileHistory.png|none|thumb|418x418px]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:ProfileEmailPreferences.png&diff=563 2021-12-02T15:30:34Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: </p> <hr /> <div>Profile Email Preferences</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Profile_Configuration&diff=562 2021-12-02T10:48:09Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Receiving daily briefing settings */ added more information</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Profile =<br /> The staff configuration allows each staff member to set their own environment up within Standout. Also, if the agency uses Standout for requesting and monitoring holidays, this section will allow days off to be tracked.<br /> <br /> == Available sections ==<br /> [[File:ProfileTabs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Account Details           basic account information for the staff member<br /> <br /> Dashboard options      Disable and Enable Dashboard components and limit recent items<br /> <br /> Holidays                      allow staff to monitor and request holiday requests<br /> <br /> Staff profile                 if your website has been created by ISSL and have individual staff member profiles, this section will allow information to be amended when displayed on the agents website.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email preferences       allows the configuration of the Daily Briefing email and a signature when sending emails from Standout<br /> <br /> Daily email                  if enabled, displays a copy of the latest daily email<br /> <br /> Email linking                allows Standout to operate directly with an email address (such as Gmail/Outlook etc)<br /> <br /> History                         show the record events of task undertaken within Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Account Details ==<br /> [[File:ProfileAccount.png|none|thumb|602x602px]]<br /> <br /> === Main details ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Username                   the name used to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Password                    the password entered to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Title                             choose the correct title<br /> <br /> First name                   should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Surname                     should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Direct telephone         best number to be contacted on<br /> <br /> Email address              email address for the staff member<br /> <br /> Reply to                       either the staff member or branch email<br /> <br /> Job title                       if a specific title is required<br /> <br /> Qualifications              professional qualifications<br /> <br /> === New Property Walkthrough ===<br /> <br /> <br /> New property walkthrough is a new feather which allows an alternative way to enter properties. Based on a question/answer entry system, allowing new users to simply enter properties until familiar with the main property details. This can be used or not used.<br /> <br /> === Colour scheme ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Colour scheme            allows a choice of Light or Dark<br /> <br /> === Two-factor authentication ===<br /> <br /> <br /> You can add an extra layer of security to your Standout Property Manager account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA). This requires you to have access to your phone when you log in, and means even if your password is compromised or stolen, only you can log in to your account.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More information to start this procedure.<br /> <br /> === Work days ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configure which days the staff member works<br /> <br /> === Teams I belong to ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shows any teams that have been created in Administration/Teams<br /> <br /> == Dashboard options ==<br /> [[File:ProfileDashboardOptions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Local weather                         choose to have the next 7 days weather shown on the dashboard<br /> <br /> Show Today                            choose to show Today’s Appointments and Tasks<br /> <br /> Show Performance Chart       choose to show the Performance Chart<br /> <br /> Recent properties                   choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited properties<br /> <br /> Recent Contacts                      choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited contacts<br /> <br /> <br /> == Holidays ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The holiday entitlement is set in Administration/Staff and allows staff members to be then able to request holidays. A manager or other authorised staff member should then Authorise or Decline a request.<br /> [[File:ProfileHolidays.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Staff profile ==<br /> [[File:ProfileWebProfile.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff profile enabled               place a tick to enable<br /> <br /> Biography                                biography of the staff member<br /> <br /> Photo                                      upload a photo of the staff member<br /> <br /> == Email preferences ==<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailSettings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> == Receiving daily briefing settings ==<br /> You can choose from the following options about your daily briefing email:<br /> <br /> * Disabled - do not receive the daily email<br /> * Enabled - receive the daily email at the default time<br /> * 5am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 6am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 7am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 8am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 9am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 10am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> By enabling or disabling the following options, these will be shown in the daily briefing email<br /> <br /> * Tip of the day<br /> * Appointments for your team<br /> * Office awaiting viewing feedback<br /> * Viewings requiring feedback<br /> * No viewings<br /> * Property changes<br /> * New applicants<br /> * Potential vendors<br /> * New properties<br /> <br /> === Receiving emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to define the sections included if Receive Daily Briefing email.<br /> <br /> === Sending Emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to create an email signature when sending emails from Standout.<br /> <br /> == Email linking ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Entering your email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailLink.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You should be able to obtain the email details from your own Email service provider, unfortunately, the Support team at Standout will not be able to assist with this configuration as that information will be unable to us.<br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> <br /> <br /> History will display any log information stored against a staff member, system events can be removed to reduce the amount of information shown on screen.<br /> [[File:ProfileHistory.png|none|thumb|418x418px]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Profile_Configuration&diff=561 2021-12-02T10:44:10Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Email preferences */ added new drop down option</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Profile =<br /> The staff configuration allows each staff member to set their own environment up within Standout. Also, if the agency uses Standout for requesting and monitoring holidays, this section will allow days off to be tracked.<br /> <br /> == Available sections ==<br /> [[File:ProfileTabs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Account Details           basic account information for the staff member<br /> <br /> Dashboard options      Disable and Enable Dashboard components and limit recent items<br /> <br /> Holidays                      allow staff to monitor and request holiday requests<br /> <br /> Staff profile                 if your website has been created by ISSL and have individual staff member profiles, this section will allow information to be amended when displayed on the agents website.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email preferences       allows the configuration of the Daily Briefing email and a signature when sending emails from Standout<br /> <br /> Daily email                  if enabled, displays a copy of the latest daily email<br /> <br /> Email linking                allows Standout to operate directly with an email address (such as Gmail/Outlook etc)<br /> <br /> History                         show the record events of task undertaken within Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Account Details ==<br /> [[File:ProfileAccount.png|none|thumb|602x602px]]<br /> <br /> === Main details ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Username                   the name used to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Password                    the password entered to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Title                             choose the correct title<br /> <br /> First name                   should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Surname                     should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Direct telephone         best number to be contacted on<br /> <br /> Email address              email address for the staff member<br /> <br /> Reply to                       either the staff member or branch email<br /> <br /> Job title                       if a specific title is required<br /> <br /> Qualifications              professional qualifications<br /> <br /> === New Property Walkthrough ===<br /> <br /> <br /> New property walkthrough is a new feather which allows an alternative way to enter properties. Based on a question/answer entry system, allowing new users to simply enter properties until familiar with the main property details. This can be used or not used.<br /> <br /> === Colour scheme ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Colour scheme            allows a choice of Light or Dark<br /> <br /> === Two-factor authentication ===<br /> <br /> <br /> You can add an extra layer of security to your Standout Property Manager account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA). This requires you to have access to your phone when you log in, and means even if your password is compromised or stolen, only you can log in to your account.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More information to start this procedure.<br /> <br /> === Work days ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configure which days the staff member works<br /> <br /> === Teams I belong to ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shows any teams that have been created in Administration/Teams<br /> <br /> == Dashboard options ==<br /> [[File:ProfileDashboardOptions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Local weather                         choose to have the next 7 days weather shown on the dashboard<br /> <br /> Show Today                            choose to show Today’s Appointments and Tasks<br /> <br /> Show Performance Chart       choose to show the Performance Chart<br /> <br /> Recent properties                   choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited properties<br /> <br /> Recent Contacts                      choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited contacts<br /> <br /> <br /> == Holidays ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The holiday entitlement is set in Administration/Staff and allows staff members to be then able to request holidays. A manager or other authorised staff member should then Authorise or Decline a request.<br /> [[File:ProfileHolidays.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Staff profile ==<br /> [[File:ProfileWebProfile.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff profile enabled               place a tick to enable<br /> <br /> Biography                                biography of the staff member<br /> <br /> Photo                                      upload a photo of the staff member<br /> <br /> == Email preferences ==<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailSettings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> == Receiving daily briefing settings ==<br /> You can choose from the following options about your daily briefing email:<br /> <br /> * Disabled - do not receive the daily email<br /> * Enabled - receive the daily email at the default time<br /> * 5am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 6am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 7am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 8am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 9am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> * 10am - receive the daily email around this time<br /> <br /> === Receiving emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to define the sections included if Receive Daily Briefing email.<br /> <br /> === Sending Emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to create an email signature when sending emails from Standout.<br /> <br /> == Email linking ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Entering your email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailLink.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You should be able to obtain the email details from your own Email service provider, unfortunately, the Support team at Standout will not be able to assist with this configuration as that information will be unable to us.<br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> <br /> <br /> History will display any log information stored against a staff member, system events can be removed to reduce the amount of information shown on screen.<br /> [[File:ProfileHistory.png|none|thumb|418x418px]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Profile_Configuration&diff=560 2021-12-02T10:37:38Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Email preferences */</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Profile =<br /> The staff configuration allows each staff member to set their own environment up within Standout. Also, if the agency uses Standout for requesting and monitoring holidays, this section will allow days off to be tracked.<br /> <br /> == Available sections ==<br /> [[File:ProfileTabs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Account Details           basic account information for the staff member<br /> <br /> Dashboard options      Disable and Enable Dashboard components and limit recent items<br /> <br /> Holidays                      allow staff to monitor and request holiday requests<br /> <br /> Staff profile                 if your website has been created by ISSL and have individual staff member profiles, this section will allow information to be amended when displayed on the agents website.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email preferences       allows the configuration of the Daily Briefing email and a signature when sending emails from Standout<br /> <br /> Daily email                  if enabled, displays a copy of the latest daily email<br /> <br /> Email linking                allows Standout to operate directly with an email address (such as Gmail/Outlook etc)<br /> <br /> History                         show the record events of task undertaken within Standout<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Account Details ==<br /> [[File:ProfileAccount.png|none|thumb|602x602px]]<br /> <br /> === Main details ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Username                   the name used to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Password                    the password entered to log into Standout<br /> <br /> Title                             choose the correct title<br /> <br /> First name                   should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Surname                     should a name change be required<br /> <br /> Direct telephone         best number to be contacted on<br /> <br /> Email address              email address for the staff member<br /> <br /> Reply to                       either the staff member or branch email<br /> <br /> Job title                       if a specific title is required<br /> <br /> Qualifications              professional qualifications<br /> <br /> === New Property Walkthrough ===<br /> <br /> <br /> New property walkthrough is a new feather which allows an alternative way to enter properties. Based on a question/answer entry system, allowing new users to simply enter properties until familiar with the main property details. This can be used or not used.<br /> <br /> === Colour scheme ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Colour scheme            allows a choice of Light or Dark<br /> <br /> === Two-factor authentication ===<br /> <br /> <br /> You can add an extra layer of security to your Standout Property Manager account by turning on two-factor authentication (2FA). This requires you to have access to your phone when you log in, and means even if your password is compromised or stolen, only you can log in to your account.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More information to start this procedure.<br /> <br /> === Work days ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Configure which days the staff member works<br /> <br /> === Teams I belong to ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shows any teams that have been created in Administration/Teams<br /> <br /> == Dashboard options ==<br /> [[File:ProfileDashboardOptions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Local weather                         choose to have the next 7 days weather shown on the dashboard<br /> <br /> Show Today                            choose to show Today’s Appointments and Tasks<br /> <br /> Show Performance Chart       choose to show the Performance Chart<br /> <br /> Recent properties                   choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited properties<br /> <br /> Recent Contacts                      choose to display between 5 – 10 recently edited contacts<br /> <br /> <br /> == Holidays ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The holiday entitlement is set in Administration/Staff and allows staff members to be then able to request holidays. A manager or other authorised staff member should then Authorise or Decline a request.<br /> [[File:ProfileHolidays.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Staff profile ==<br /> [[File:ProfileWebProfile.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff profile enabled               place a tick to enable<br /> <br /> Biography                                biography of the staff member<br /> <br /> Photo                                      upload a photo of the staff member<br /> <br /> == Email preferences ==<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailSettings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> === Receiving emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to define the sections included if Receive Daily Briefing email.<br /> <br /> === Sending Emails ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Allows the staff member to create an email signature when sending emails from Standout.<br /> <br /> == Email linking ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Entering your email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.<br /> [[File:ProfileEmailLink.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You should be able to obtain the email details from your own Email service provider, unfortunately, the Support team at Standout will not be able to assist with this configuration as that information will be unable to us.<br /> <br /> <br /> == History ==<br /> <br /> <br /> History will display any log information stored against a staff member, system events can be removed to reduce the amount of information shown on screen.<br /> [[File:ProfileHistory.png|none|thumb|418x418px]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:ProfileEmailSettings.png&diff=559 2021-12-02T10:36:44Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: </p> <hr /> <div>Email Settings in Profile</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Staff_Holidays&diff=558 2021-12-01T15:59:43Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Holidays */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>= Holidays =<br /> Standout has the ability to record holidays in the [[Diary Overview|Diary]]. There are two types of staff that are catered for, those that can book their own holidays, those that can’t. When you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link Standout to your Office 365 account. This will allow holidays/ to be created in Standout AND in your Outlook Calendar. When you request a holiday, in Outlook &quot;- (Requested)&quot; will be added and when authorised it will be changed to &quot;- (Approved)&quot;.<br /> <br /> <br /> So that the branch can control holidays, we recommend that the Branch Manager (or a suitable member of staff) has the ability of authorising holiday requests as well as being able to add their own into the diary.<br /> <br /> <br /> Those that can’t add holidays into the diary will be able to “Request a holiday”, an email and a notification will be sent to the authorising member of staff so they can then review and either authorise or decline a holiday request.<br /> == Requesting a Holiday ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff can request a holiday in multiple ways, they can click on “Your Staff Name” in the top right-hand corner of any screen, this will open the Staff members profile.<br /> [[File:Holiday1.png|none|thumb|518x518px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Select the second tab “Holidays”<br /> [[File:Holiday2.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The staff member is presented with the above information regarding their holidays.<br /> <br /> <br /> Holiday entitlement per year             How many days in total they are entitled to<br /> <br /> Holidays requested/confirmed          How many days in total have been requested/confirmed<br /> <br /> Holidays remaining                             How many days they have left<br /> <br /> Refresh                                                if you Request a holiday, once you return to this screen, you can click this button to reload all holidays for viewing.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The staff member will be shown a list of holidays taken, holidays taken/requested are ones that have either been requested/confirmed/declined in the past and then holidays booked/requested for future requests.<br /> <br /> <br /> If a branch manager or a staff member opens this tab, instead of “Request a holiday” button, it will read “Book a holiday”.<br /> <br /> <br /> When requesting a holiday, Standout will send an email to one of the authorising members of staff and a notification will appear on their dashboard to ask for them to review the request(s).<br /> <br /> <br /> When the request has been processed, the staff member will receive both an email and a notification, regardless of the request being accepted or declined.<br /> <br /> <br /> The staff member can see the appointment with the reason why the request has been declined by simply clicking on the word Declined.<br /> <br /> === Requesting a holiday ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Simply click on the Request a holiday, this will open a new tab in your browser showing the Diary. Find the date you wish your holiday to start on, then either click “Request a holiday button or double click on a time in the day.<br /> [[File:Holiday3.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The options to create a holiday request are:<br /> <br /> <br /> Start Date                                When the holiday request starts<br /> <br /> End Date                                 When the holiday request ends (can be the same day)<br /> <br /> End Time                                 When holiday requests are multiple days AND returning at some time on the final day<br /> <br /> Time Off<br /> <br /> All Day                                     To request all day off<br /> <br /> AM Only                                  When only the morning is required (9am-12am)<br /> <br /> PM Only                                  When only the afternoon is required (12am-5pm)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you click Create appointment, the person that authorises holiday requests will be send both an email and a Standout Notification.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Requesting a holiday from the Diary ===<br /> <br /> <br /> To create a holiday request by clicking on +New<br /> [[File:Holiday4.png|none|thumb|557x557px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Change the category to either “Holiday requested” or “Staff holiday”, ensure the dates and times, all day (if required) are configured correctly and click Create appointment. The relevant staff will be emailed/notified regarding the request.<br /> <br /> == Authorising Holiday Requests ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Holiday requests will only appear, in between Reports and Administration, when there are requests to process.<br /> [[File:Holiday5.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Staff Name                  the person requesting a holiday. By clicking on their name, a new tab will open and show their holidays in the Administration/Staff section.<br /> <br />                                    Close this tab when happy to process the requests.<br /> <br /> <br /> View in the Diary        Opens in a new tab the Diary, and also opens the holiday request so that you can Authorise or Decline the request.<br /> <br /> === Viewing Requests ===<br /> [[File:Holiday6.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Decision ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Approved                    approve the request<br /> <br /> Declined                      decline the request<br /> <br /> Decline reason            add to the Notes further information regarding the reason for declining a request.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Save                            Save the decision<br /> <br /> Close                           Do not do anything with this request<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you have processed this request, click on the X to close the tab, then press Refresh to re-load all the outstanding Holiday requests.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Standout_-_Quick_Start&diff=557 2021-11-30T15:43:16Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* 2nd Factor Authentication */ a</p> <hr /> <div>&lt;h1&gt;Accessing Standout Property Manager&lt;/h1&gt; <br /> <br /> To access Standout Property Manager, it’s best to use an up to date web browser. We suggest Chrome, but all modern browsers should work without issue. However, we do not recommend older Internet Explorer browsers as this application can be problematic. <br /> <br /> Enter the following URL to gain access to Standout Property Manager:<br /> <br /> &lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.standoutpropertymanager.co.uk/login&lt;/nowiki&gt; <br /> <br /> We would suggest bookmarking the above link in your browser for easy access. <br /> <br /> =Logging into Standout Property Manager= <br /> <br /> You should be presented with the systems login page, which looks like: <br /> [[File:Login Form.png|none|thumb|587x587px]] <br /> <br /> The above is a snippet from the login page, to proceed you’ll need to know the Client ID which is the same for all users in your company and your individual Username, every user in Standout Property Manager must use their own Username and should never share passwords. <br /> <br /> If you’ve forgotten your password, you can click on the wording “click here” to then reset your password. <br /> <br /> Whilst using Standout Property Manager, should you require help or information, please do not hesitate to send an email to our Support Team. The email address is support@issl.co.uk and a support ticket will be opened in our Technical Support Online System where one of our technicians will contact you in due course. <br /> <br /> Click Continue. <br /> [[File:Login Password.png|none|thumb|500x500px]] <br /> <br /> Enter your password and then click Log in. <br /> <br /> ==2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Factor Authentication== <br /> <br /> If 2nd factor authentication is enabled on your account you will need to enter the 6-digit code to proceed, you will need your smart phone at this point. 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Factor Authentication is an advanced security system that prevents access to your account unless you have the time limited code.<br /> <br /> Google Authenticator is available in both Google Play Store and Apple App Store.<br /> <br /> 2nd factor authentication is enabled in your [[Profile Configuration]]<br /> <br /> == Office 365 Login ==<br /> Standout can now link appointments created in Standout in your Office 365 Calendar. Click Login to Office 365 button, you will initially enter your password and if successful, you will be re-directed back to Dashboard and be informed all appointments created, edited or deleted will also replicate to your Outlook Calendar. If you create an appointment for a colleague, it will show in your Outlook calendar and inform you that you are not required to attend (such as a valuation or viewing). If you wish to disconnect Standout from Office 365, click the Logout of Office 365 button. When you next log in, Standout will look at all your future appointments and if not replicated to your Outlook calendar, Standout will replicate them. <br /> <br /> =Dashboard=<br /> [[File:New Dashboard.png|alt=|thumb|1300x1300px|none]]<br /> The [[The Dashboard|Dashboard]] is the default screen and where will come back to. There are six parts to this screen. <br /> <br /> Dashboard options run down the left side<br /> <br /> Status Bar – runs across the top <br /> <br /> Office 365 - a new button near the top left of the screen will allow you to link Standout to Office 365. Appointments created in Standout when you are logged in, will automatically be created (or updated) in your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit appointments created by Standout in Outlook, always edit in Standout so that these appointments are automatically updated in Outlook Calendar. <br /> <br /> ==Dashboard quick views== <br /> <br /> Business Overview – shows relevant information regarding your properties. These will appear as more data is entered into the system <br /> <br /> Your recently edited listings <br /> <br /> Today’s appointments and Tasks <br /> <br /> Your recently edited contacts <br /> <br /> ===Performance chart=== <br /> <br /> This will show you all the properties that have a status of Sales Completed / Rentals Let / Withdrawn <br /> [[File:Performance.png|none|thumb|600x600px]] <br /> <br /> ===Local weather=== <br /> <br /> This will show a 7 day weather forecast at your office town. You can then change this for a postcode or town of your choice. This has been added to allow you to check the weather when photographing a property and choose the potential best day for outside photographs. <br /> [[File:Weather.png|none|thumb|900x900px]] <br /> <br /> ==Dashboard options== <br /> <br /> Tawk to                       integrated web chat client Tawk To – allows agents to chat with website users visiting your website (when implemented)<br /> <br /> Diary                            an internal diary to store all appointments and diarised items <br /> <br /> ===Properties=== <br /> <br /> Add property              add a new property onto the system<br /> <br /> Property List               list all properties on the system with a given criteria<br /> <br /> Progress                      list all properties with progress markers against them <br /> <br /> ===Rental=== <br /> <br /> Bulk rental payments  enter daily payments for rental payments<br /> <br /> Tenant list                   show all tenants (with active tenancy agreements)<br /> <br /> Landlord list                show all landlords (with active tenancy agreements) <br /> <br /> ===Businesses=== <br /> <br /> Add Business               should you sell businesses, enter these in this section<br /> <br /> Business list                list all businesses on the system with a given criteria <br /> <br /> ===Contacts=== <br /> <br /> Add contact                add a new contact onto the system<br /> <br /> Contact list                  list all contacts on the system with a given criteria<br /> <br /> Contacts to delete      list all contacts that you are able to remove from the system<br /> <br /> Hot contacts               those contacts that you deem to be a hot contact <br /> <br /> Reports                       various reports that extract data from the system to either Spreadsheet or PDF.<br /> <br /> Holiday Requests        those users that are able to approve or deny holiday requests will<br /> <br />                                    See this option appear once staff members place a holiday request. <br /> <br /> Administration             all the administration options to configure your agency, branches, staff and various other options<br /> <br /> ==Status bar== <br /> <br /> Version                        the systems version number, by clicking this option, shows you all the versions and improvements.<br /> <br /> Notifications                a quick view of all the system notifications, including diary appointments.<br /> <br /> Page help                    throughout the system, clicking this should show help information regarding the section that you’re working on.<br /> <br /> Colleagues                   shows colleagues that are logged onto the system <br /> <br /> Your name                   clicking this gives access for editing your profile (opens in a new tab) <br /> <br /> Log Out                       when you finish using the system, then log out for security <br /> <br /> Sticky Notes                create a post-it note type note on your desktop for reminders etc You can also create and store sticky notes in contacts and properties Within the notes tab.<br /> <br /> ==Business overview== <br /> <br /> The Business Overview contains useful information at a glance, such as how many new clients have been entered this week, whether feedback has been received and relayed to vendors, and whether there are any contacts with bounced emails (which is where an email sent by Stand Out Property Manager has been rejected, which is likely due to an invalid email address).<br /> <br /> Examples are<br /> <br />                                    Available sales<br /> <br />                                    Available rentals<br /> <br /> listings awaiting decision<br /> <br />                                    listings with no viewings in the last 30 days<br /> <br />                                    Agent awaiting viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Vendors/Landlords awaiting viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Contacts with bounced emails <br /> <br /> ===Your recently edited listings === <br /> <br /> This section shows a list of properties you’ve recently edited, showing their contract, address, status. <br /> <br /> === Your recently edited contacts=== <br /> <br /> This section shows a list of recent contacts and their definition on the system. <br /> <br /> ===Today’s appointments=== <br /> <br /> Shows appointments for yourself, and teams that you are assigned to. <br /> <br /> ===Version Control – Important Note=== <br /> <br /> As versions are implemented regularly (usually monthly), we do recommend that you read the release notes. The version will flash until you click on it but is important to view this information as if you have recommended a system change or improvement, will let you know what has been released. <br /> <br /> ===Notifications===<br /> [[File:Notification Window.png|thumb|alt=|none]]<br /> When you have notifications a “pill” will appear with the number of notifications, if you wish to delete them, simply hover over it and click on the x for it to be permanently deleted.<br /> ===Page Help ===<br /> [[File:PageHelp.png|none|thumb]]<br /> Throughout Standout, each page has its own page help to assist with you when completing the entries on that page. <br /> <br /> ===Colleagues – sending quick messages===<br /> [[File:Picture 2.png|none|thumb]]<br /> Standout has the ability to send notes to other members of your branch, by clicking on the staff member you will see: <br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |Sending a note:<br /> | Receiving a note:<br /> |-<br /> |[[File:Send Note.png|thumb]]<br /> |[[File:Receive Note.png|thumb]]<br /> |}<br /> <br /> =Getting Started with your Clients = <br /> <br /> When you have a new client, this section will advise on the processes to follow for the following:<br /> <br />                        Selling a Property<br /> <br />                        Buying a Property<br /> <br />                        Letting a Property<br /> <br />                        Renting a Property <br /> <br /> ==Selling a Property (Vendor)== <br /> <br /> When a client wishes to use your services to sell their property, we recommend the following:<br /> <br />                                    Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage<br /> <br />                                    Enter the contact – link to the property<br /> <br />                                    Book Valuation appointment<br /> <br />                                    Enter property details, photos and valuation<br /> <br />                                    Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)<br /> <br />                                    &#039;&#039;See below (Buying a Property)&#039;&#039; <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates. <br /> <br /> ==Buying a Property (Purchaser)==<br /> <br />                                    Enter contact details<br /> <br />                                    Book viewing<br /> <br />                                    Update system with viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted<br /> <br />                                    Accept offer<br /> <br />                                    Send contracts<br /> <br />                                    Finialise the Sale (SSTC)<br /> <br />                                    Completed – once everything has been exchanged <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates.<br /> <br /> == Letting a Property (Landlord)== <br /> <br /> When a client wishes to use your services to let their property, we recommend the following:<br /> <br />                                    Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage<br /> <br />                                                Management option:<br /> <br />                                                            No – client only uses you to obtain a tenant<br /> <br />                                                            Rent collection – you collect the rent on behalf of the Landlord<br /> <br /> Yes – you look after the property on behalf of the Landlord and are responsible for all agreed arrangement.<br /> <br />                                    Enter the contact – link to the property<br /> <br />                                    Book Valuation appointment<br /> <br />                                    Enter property details, photos and valuation<br /> <br />                                    Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)<br /> <br />                                    &#039;&#039;See below (Letting a Property)&#039;&#039; <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates. <br /> <br /> ==Renting a Property (Applicant/Tenant)==<br /> <br />                                    Enter contact details<br /> <br />                                    Book viewing<br /> <br />                                    Update system with viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted<br /> <br />                                    Accept offer<br /> <br />                                    Create Rental Agreement<br /> <br />                                    Finialise the Letting (Let)<br /> <br />                                    Use Bulk Payments or the Financials Tab within a Property/Rental Agreement<br /> <br /> ==Additional Contacts== <br /> <br /> Standout can also help with the following additional contacts:<br /> <br />                        Solicitors<br /> <br />                        Contractors<br /> <br />                        Rental Guarantor<br /> <br />            <br /> <br /> ==Getting started==<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings|Configuration settings list]]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ|MediaWiki FAQ]]<br /> *[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources|Localise MediaWiki for your language]]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam|Learn how to combat spam on your wiki]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=556 2021-11-30T14:58:01Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Office 365 Integration */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically, it will also be created in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.<br /> <br /> Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=555 2021-11-30T14:51:35Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Book a viewing */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. If you&#039;re logged into Office 365, any appointments created, will also be created in your Outlook Calendar.<br /> <br /> Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=554 2021-11-30T14:46:25Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Add an appointment */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365, any appointment you create will also be created in your calendar. Please note, only edit appointments in Standout, edits will be reflected in your calendar. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, it will show in your calendar, in the notes, it will tell you that you are not required.<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&diff=553 2021-11-30T14:42:59Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Office 365 Integration */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>= What is the Dashboard? =<br /> The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> At the top of your browser, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.<br /> [[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> <br /> A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-<br /> <br /> ==== Version x.x.x What’s New? ====<br /> Displays the current version of Standout. When a new version is released, the first screen displayed when you log in will be the release notes. This screen does display important information that you should really read. If you want to re-read these notes, click this option to display the release notes (this opens in the new browser tab), close the tab when you’ve finished.<br /> <br /> ==== Notifications ====<br /> [[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.<br /> <br /> ==== Page Help ====<br /> Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.<br /> <br /> ==== Colleagues ====<br /> [[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-<br /> [[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-<br /> <br /> On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-<br /> [[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-<br /> [[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> ==== Editing your profile ====<br /> If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-<br /> [[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.<br /> <br /> ==== Log Out ====<br /> This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.<br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.<br /> <br /> ==== Logo Area ====<br /> The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.<br /> <br /> ==== Quick Search ====<br /> The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.<br /> <br /> ==== Dashboard ====<br /> Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.<br /> <br /> ===== Tawk To =====<br /> <br /> === Diary ===<br /> <br /> ==== Task list ====<br /> <br /> === Properties ===<br /> <br /> ==== Telephone wizard ====<br /> <br /> ==== Add property ====<br /> <br /> ==== Property list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Progress ====<br /> <br /> === Rental ===<br /> <br /> ==== Bulk rental payments ====<br /> <br /> ==== Tenant list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Landlord list ====<br /> <br /> === Contacts ===<br /> <br /> ==== Add contact ====<br /> <br /> ==== Contact list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Contacts to delete ====<br /> <br /> ==== Hot contacts ====<br /> Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts<br /> <br /> === Reports ===<br /> <br /> === Online Manuals ===<br /> You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.<br /> <br /> === Administration ===<br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Main area&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> <br /> ==== Office 365 Integration ====<br /> When you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link Standout to your Office 365 account. This will allow appointments to be created in Standout AND in your Outlook Calendar. When you log in, Standout will synchronise appointments (both new and existing future appointments) into your Outlook calendar. If you wish to change an appointment, you must edit them in Standout and NOT Outlook so that synchronisation occurs. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment will be displayed in your calendar but a message in the notes will tell you that you are not the one attending the appointment. <br /> <br /> ==== Your recently edited listings ====<br /> This area displays properties that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the main photo, the property reference, contract, status, price, display address, quick link to edit, if a rental a quick link to the Agreements.<br /> <br /> To the right there are quick links to display All properties and/or All businesses. <br /> <br /> ==== Your recently edited contacts ====<br /> This area displays the contacts that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the contact Title, First and Surname and what they are (e.g. Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, Solicitor). To the right is a quick link to edit their details.<br /> <br /> To the right there are quick links to display All contacts.<br /> <br /> ==== Today&#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====<br /> This area displays appointments and tasks that are assigned to you. By clicking on them, you will be taken to the Diary where the item will be displayed, allowing you to view, or if required, update the details.<br /> <br /> To the right, View diary will take you to the Diary for today. Clicking “Create a task” will allow you to create a new task.<br /> <br /> ==== Performance Chart ====<br /> This area displays those properties that have been Let/Completed/Withdrawn over the last twelve months. An informational display to display how successful your agency has been.<br /> <br /> ==== Local weather ====<br /> This area displays the local weather based on town/postcode information provided in your branch configuration. The data displayed will be for the current day and the next seven days. If you want to view a different area, enter a postcode or town to be displayed. This area is displayed to assist in photographing a property, blue skies promote a property far greater than wet days – not that we’re able to change the weather!</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property_Overview&diff=552 2021-11-25T15:53:14Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Creating a rent review appointment */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Creating a rental property ==<br /> <br /> == Rental Modes ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout works with three modes of Rental properties classed as Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Managed?<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |No<br /> |In this mode all you are responsible for is to find a tenant for a Landlords property, normally just a fee will be raised for this service.<br /> |-<br /> |Rent Collection<br /> |In this mode you will collect rent from tenants and pass the payment minus your fees to the Landlord and are not responsible for anything regarding the property.<br /> |-<br /> |Yes<br /> |In this mode you will arrange everything concerning the property, repairs, certificates, rent.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> == Rental Tab ==<br /> [[File:Picture 1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Rental options ===<br /> Shared property<br /> <br /> Standout can cater for a Shared Property (HMO) and can be configured by part of the system. For an in-depth overview, please see our document “Rental Property HMO Overview”.<br /> <br /> <br /> Property finance information<br /> [[File:Property Finance.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> If you have the financial information regarding the property from the landlord, these figures can be stored here:<br /> <br /> Mortgage provider information         who the current mortgage is with<br /> <br /> Mortgage terms                                  the number of years on the mortgage<br /> <br /> Purchase price                                    what was paid for this property<br /> <br /> Purchase date                                     when the Landlord purchased the property<br /> <br /> Monthly repayment amount              how much the Landlord is repaying on this property<br /> <br /> === Utility providers ===<br /> [[File:Utility Providers.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout allows you to store the current utility providers that service this property.<br /> <br /> === Inventory ===<br /> [[File:Inventory.png|none|thumb|330x330px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If a property has items that within it that the Landlord has agreed that the tenant can use, this section will record those items<br /> [[File:Inventory Details.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Please note: You must have a Dropbox or Google Drive account configured if you wish to upload files.<br /> <br /> <br /> Room              which room is the item in<br /> <br /> Item Name      name of the item<br /> <br /> Condition        what condition is it in<br /> <br /> Quantity          how many of these item(s)<br /> <br /> Value               value of the item(s)<br /> <br /> Notes              additional notes<br /> <br /> <br /> Example:<br /> [[File:Inventory Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Inventory print ====<br /> [[File:Inventory Print.png|none|thumb]]<br /> The report will be shown in a new tab in your browser, allowing you to print either onto paper or to a PDF document.<br /> <br /> === Repairs – recording, assigning and invoicing ===<br /> [[File:Repairs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> When a tenant contacts your branch to report a repair in this tab you can record the repair, then you can allocate this repair to a contractor. Once a contractor has undertaken the repair, an invoice can then be raised.<br /> <br /> ==== Adding a repair ====<br /> [[File:Adding a Repair.png|900px|thumb|none|alt=Adding a repair to a rental property|Adding a repair to a rental property]]<br /> This form will allow you to record the repair whilst your tenant in on the phone or in branch:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection<br /> [[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb|275x275px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here                                                        <br /> [[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb|335x335px]]<br />                                                            By clicking Create contact a new tab will open in your browser<br /> <br /> <br /> Date reported                                   the date tenant reports the issue(s)<br /> <br /> Reported to                                       the staff member logging the report<br /> <br /> Date passed to contractor              date the staff member passes to the contractor<br /> <br /> Date to be fixed                                date quoted by the contractor<br /> <br /> Date fixed                                          date of the actual repair<br /> <br /> Contact method                               how did the tenant contact you – phone/visit?<br /> <br /> Description of problem                   full description of this repair/issue<br /> <br /> Addition staff notes                         any internal staff note<br /> <br /> Quoted cost                                      quoted cost by the contractor<br /> <br /> Fixed cost                                          the actual cost (if different than the quote)<br /> <br /> Send repair to contractor by SMS           Send the details (either creating or editing) to a contractor by SMS (you MUST enter the contractors mobile address) AND have SMS credit<br /> <br /> Signed off by tenant / agent           work completed and accepted by tenant<br /> <br /> <br /> Once this has been saved, you will need to re-edit this repair, to enter additional details, costs, change of contractor.<br /> [[File:RepairNew.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ===== Updating the repair =====<br /> [[File:Updating a Repair to a rental property.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> Having chosen (or even amended the contractor), update the repair with any further details such as quoted date, cost or additional information relevant to the repair.<br /> <br /> ===== Send details to the contractor =====<br /> [[File:Send Details To Contractor.png|none|thumb|527x527px]]<br /> The above is the Master Letter but you can duplicate and amend this letter (Administration/Letter templates). By choosing Email, when you click the Go button, Standout will queue and send your letter by email to the contractor.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Once the repair has been completed, update the repair with the final details<br /> [[File:Update Repair.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> Click on Save and then Save Property, both saves are required prior to raising an invoice to the Landlord.<br /> <br /> ===== Invoicing the Landlord =====<br /> [[File:Invoice Landlord.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> Simply click the Invoice landlord which will then raise an invoice, to view invoices, if you go to Rental Agreements and then Financials you will then be able to see the invoice in the transactions list<br /> [[File:Invoice List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Print an invoice to the Landlord (or Tenant) – for this example we will choose the Finders Fee transaction<br /> <br /> <br /> Click Actions then Print Invoice<br /> [[File:Print Invoice.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> Whilst you can select either, it best to use Landlord Invoice for Landlords and Tenant Invoice for Tenants.<br /> <br /> ===== Printing the invoice =====<br /> [[File:Print Invoice 2.png|none|thumb]]<br /> You can either print the Letter, Email or both, choose your option then click Go. If you’ve configured a file storage provider, copies are stored in the Files tab in the property.<br /> <br /> === Recurring payments ===<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> These payments generate a payment request to the tenant, and are intended to be used for things like extra car parking space, gardening services, window cleaning etc, automatically applied to active agreements and can be seen in the Financials tab<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a recurring payment ====<br /> [[File:Create Recurring Payment.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Enabled                                               to save deleting payments, Enable or Disable as required<br /> <br /> Details of recurring payment              Details of the payment<br /> <br /> Recurring amount                               How much is the payment required from the tenant<br /> <br /> Frequency period                               How often do you need an invoice raising<br /> <br /> Day of payment                                  Which Day (Sunday-Saturay)<br /> <br /> Subject to VAT                                    Does the amount include VAT<br /> <br /> ===== Recurring payment example =====<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Recurring payment example in Financials =====<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments in Financials.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> To print or email a copy of the invoice to the tenant, just click Actions then choose Print Invoice.<br /> <br /> === Service appointments ===<br /> [[File:Service Appointments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when an appliance requires a service, such as a boiler, fire alarm, burglar alarm or anything else.<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a service appointment ====<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any service appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.[[File:Create A Service Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection<br /> [[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here<br /> [[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb]]<br />                                                            <br /> <br /> Subject of the service appointment   This is the subject line of the email that will be sent<br /> <br /> Details of service appointment          Details of the service appointment<br /> <br /> Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property<br /> <br /> Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property<br /> <br /> ===== Service appointment example =====<br /> [[File:Service Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> === Rent review appointments ===<br /> [[File:Rent Review Appointments.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when arranging a rental price review with the current tenant.<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a rent review appointment ====<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.[[File:Create Rent Review Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject of the appointment               This is the subject line of the email that will be sent<br /> <br /> Details of appointment                       Details of the rent review appointment<br /> <br /> Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property<br /> <br /> Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property<br /> <br /> ===== Rent review appointment example =====<br /> [[File:Rent Review Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> === Occupants ===<br /> [[File:Occupants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section is to record those occupants under 18 years of age that may need to be recorded. An occupant can only be added to a property whilst there is a tenancy agreement in place<br /> <br /> ==== Adding an occupant ====<br /> [[File:Adding an Occupant.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Enter their Name, Gender, Date of birth and any notes that need to be stored, clicking Save will either add a new occupant or update an existing one.<br /> <br /> == Rental Mode - Fully Managed ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This document will assume that you’ve created a new property, linked it to a Landlord, placed it on the market and have now found a tenant for said property.<br /> <br /> <br /> Throughout this process, Standout will offer to create Letters to send to all parties concerned. These will be stored against the property and will allow them to be printed and/or emailed. Side note – all Letters can be amended in Administration / Letters.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once your potential client has visited the property (Book Viewing) and offers a rental figure, open the property and select the Viewing / offer tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll see all the viewings and offers. Select your client, click Make offer (print/email appropriate letter) you will then see<br /> [[File:Viewings And Offers.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Click the Accept offer and a warning will appear near the top/centre of your screen<br /> [[File:Accept Offer.png|none|thumb|480x480px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You can print/email or both when producing letters, click Go to print your documents for each of the contacts (Standout creates docx documents).<br /> <br /> <br /> Once complete, click the Back to Property button near the bottom of the screen.<br /> <br /> <br /> The property is now at the status of “Under offer”<br /> <br /> <br /> Once under offer and you’ve completed all the necessary credit checks, obtained the deposit from the tenant, you can then create the tenancy agreement.<br /> <br /> === Creating the tenancy agreement ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> SMS text messages can be sent to the tenant, this can be from one to seven days before the rent being due. This option is reliant on one of three configuration settings, a valid email and/or a valid mobile number on the tenant record and SMS credits will need to be purchased, for more information see the Administration Manual and/or the system in Administration / Branch / SMS.<br /> <br /> <br /> Please see below where to configure these settings in an agreement.<br /> [[File:Property Actions.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More actions and then choose the Rental agreements option to continue<br /> <br /> === Agreements ===<br /> [[File:Agreements.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If any older agreements exist, they will be listed on the left side of the screen and can be viewed. To create an agreement, all the required information will be on the right side of the screen:<br /> [[File:Agreement Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Agreement Details ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Within Agreement details, the following information needs to be input:<br /> <br /> <br /> Agreement Date                     the date the agreement is created<br /> <br /> Reference                               a unique reference for this tenancy agreement<br /> <br /> Let period                               Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly/Annually/Per 4 Weeks/Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Initial Period (Monthly)          the amount of time (in months) the tenancy is for (eg: 6/12/18/24)<br /> <br /> Start Date                                the date the Tenant moves into the property<br /> <br /> End Date                                 the date that the agreement ends<br /> <br /> Rolling Contract                      if both Landlord and Tenant agrees to a rolling contract set this option to Yes, otherwise No for the contact to end<br /> <br /> Auto Update Tenancy             change the Tenants address automatically from the one<br /> <br /> Address                                   entered on the system, with the address of this property.<br /> <br /> Let Price                                  the price the Tenant will pay during the tenancy<br /> <br /> Bond Price                               the price of the Bond that will be paid and transferred to your Deposit Holding Scheme<br /> <br /> Finders Fee                             the amount you charge a Landlord for arranging a tenancy<br /> <br /> First Payment Due                  the first date when payments are due<br /> <br /> Payment Terms                       the number of days when a payment becomes overdue<br /> <br /> Day to pay Landlord               when you are due to pay the Landlord his part of a tenancy Payment<br /> <br /> Send a rent reminder             If you choose to send the tenant a rent reminder, you can<br /> <br /> Choose between 0 (disabled) up to 7 days prior<br /> <br /> Send rent reminder by           How to send the reminder – Disabled / Email / SMS&lt;sup&gt;*&lt;/sup&gt;<br /> <br /> Tenancy deposit Scheme        which scheme you have signed to<br /> <br /> Deposit Scheme reference     reference for this bond payment<br /> <br /> Additional Clauses                  any addition clauses that may be outside of the written<br /> <br /> tenancy agreement<br /> <br /> <br /> Note – Rent reminder emails can be customised by go to Administration/Email templates and duplicate the master version for your own agent version.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;nowiki&gt;*&lt;/nowiki&gt; SMS messages will only be sent if there is sufficient credit on your account (to check this go to Administration / Branch / Branch Name then the SMS tab<br /> <br /> ==== Initial Inspection Visit ====<br /> [[File:Initial Inspection.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> If you have visited the property prior to this can be recorded here.<br /> <br /> ==== Guarantor ====<br /> [[File:Guarantor.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> If you require a tenant to provide a guarantor, once you’ve added their details into the system, you can start typing their first name will appear in this area to link to this agreement.<br /> <br /> ==== Fee details ====<br /> [[File:Fee Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This is the amount you take from the rental amount to pay for your services. This can be a fixed amount or a Percentage. Fees will be applied on either the due date of the tenants payment or when the tenant actually pays that periods rent.<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff details<br /> [[File:Staff Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Select a member of Staff to enter all diary appointment and reminders to. This does not have to be the member of staff creating the agreement.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Meter readings ===<br /> [[File:Meter Readings.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Start of Tenancy ====<br /> Compete all those know fields prior to the tenant moving in, if you have that information to hand.<br /> <br /> ==== During Tenancy ====<br /> Throughout the tenancy you can add meter readings, click the Record readings button. Then choose the date the meter readings were provided by your tenant. You must enter at least 1 meter reading for the information to be recorded. They can be either Gas, Electricity, Water or Oil. Once you have entered at least one set of meter readings, all readings will be displayed in a table. Should you enter the wrong information, you can delete those details by clicking and confirming your deletion request.<br /> <br /> Once all the information has been completed, click Create agreement<br /> <br /> === Creating the Tenancy Agreement ===<br /> [[File:Create The Tenancy Agreement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> Upon successful creation of a tenancy agreement the system will take you to the Letter section. There will be a selection of pre-defined and user-defined letters available. Prior to using the system, we recommend that you create agency specific documents, especially tenancy agreements.<br /> <br /> <br /> The default (Master) documents are:<br /> <br />            Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement<br /> <br />            Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement – ROOM<br /> <br />            Rental Agreement<br /> <br />            Standing Order Mandate<br /> <br /> ==== Rental Agreement (Master – example) ====<br /> [[File:Rental Agreement Letter.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Click Go to create the documents (they will download to your computer)<br /> <br /> Click the Back to Property button and all the created documents will be placed in the Files linked to this property.<br /> <br /> === Financials ===<br /> [[File:Financials.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> You will see two transactions, an invoice to the Landlord for the Finders Fee and a Bond request for the Tenant pay.<br /> <br /> ==== Bond payment ====<br /> <br /> <br /> The first payment to be registered on the system, is the Tenants payment of their Bond<br /> [[File:Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> Direction                     From a Tenant/Landlord<br /> <br />                                    To a Tenant/Landlord<br /> <br /> Party                           Landlord/Tenant/Other for tenant<br /> <br /> Payment Method        Cash / Bacs / Cheque / Card<br /> <br /> Payment Type             Rent / Other / Bond<br /> <br /> Amount                       Amount being paid<br /> <br /> Date                            Date of the transaction<br /> <br /> Reference                   Reference of the payment (free form text)<br /> <br /> Description                 a free form description of the transaction<br /> [[File:BP2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You will see that the system has automatically assigned the Bond payment to the Bond request and is marked as Paid.<br /> <br /> <br /> The current status of our tenanted property now shows the Financials as<br /> [[File:Financials After Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]] <br /> <br /> We explained earlier in this document how to create an invoice (and a recurring invoice) to the tenant and the landlord, they now show as unpaid. In our scenario (which will probably never occur – but, so that we can show transactions in this document) is that the tenant received keys, started to move in and then subsequently lost them, the Landlord agreed in good faith to pay half so we have raised an invoice to the Landlord for £100 for the contractors fee and then an invoice to the tenant for £50 as they split the bill. <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Tenant Rent payment ====<br /> <br /> <br /> We will record a payment of the Tenants first month’s rent on the 10/04/20 within the Bulk Payment section – for how to do this and see how to use Bulk Payments, please see the Bulk Payments Document. We also paid the outstanding tenant invoice for the locksmith.<br /> [[File:Tenant Rent Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> Our tenant does not owe any monies as all payments, rent due and invoices have now been completed.<br /> <br /> ==== Landlord payment ====<br /> Depending on how you have configured the agreement, the payment to the Landlord will either be due now, or after a number of days (we configured it for 2 days from receiving payment). In our example, the Landlord is now due a payment of £247.87.<br /> [[File:Landlord Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Financials statement ====<br /> [[File:Financials Statement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> The financials statement shows that all parties are even (no payments due) but, two invoices show that they have not been paid. As this is incorrect, simply choose Actions and click “Mark paid” to both of them<br /> [[File:Financials Statement2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> Now all figures and financial lines are correct.<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Landlord statement ====<br /> Should a Landlord with to obtain a statement from you, all you need to do, is choose from the following<br /> [[File:Landlord Statement 1.png|none|thumb|368x368px]]<br /> <br /> Select the chosen Date range and click Generate statement<br /> [[File:Landlord Statement 2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> You can then either Download Statement or Email PDF to contact depending on your requirements.<br /> <br /> === Emailing all tenants ===<br /> When editing a Shared property (HMO), you can now email all the tenants with a current agreement. Simply click More actions and then Email all tenants button<br /> [[File:Email All Tenants.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Simply add a subject and email body, click Send email and all tenants that have supplied an email address will receive the email. This could be used when tenants need to be informed of communal area repairs or disruptions.<br /> <br /> = Rent Reminder Email Template =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To amend the template, go to Administration / Email Templates tab<br /> <br /> When customising your own email, ensure that you click the “Duplicate” button before editing, once you’ve completed your changes, click “Save email”.<br /> <br /> You can change the wording of this email, but you must ensure that you keep the field names within {} the same, otherwise, the system will not replace them correctly for your tenant details.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Property_Overview&diff=551 2021-11-25T15:51:10Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Creating a service appointment */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Creating a rental property ==<br /> <br /> == Rental Modes ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout works with three modes of Rental properties classed as Managed:<br /> <br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |+<br /> !Managed?<br /> !<br /> |-<br /> |No<br /> |In this mode all you are responsible for is to find a tenant for a Landlords property, normally just a fee will be raised for this service.<br /> |-<br /> |Rent Collection<br /> |In this mode you will collect rent from tenants and pass the payment minus your fees to the Landlord and are not responsible for anything regarding the property.<br /> |-<br /> |Yes<br /> |In this mode you will arrange everything concerning the property, repairs, certificates, rent.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> == Rental Tab ==<br /> [[File:Picture 1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> === Rental options ===<br /> Shared property<br /> <br /> Standout can cater for a Shared Property (HMO) and can be configured by part of the system. For an in-depth overview, please see our document “Rental Property HMO Overview”.<br /> <br /> <br /> Property finance information<br /> [[File:Property Finance.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> If you have the financial information regarding the property from the landlord, these figures can be stored here:<br /> <br /> Mortgage provider information         who the current mortgage is with<br /> <br /> Mortgage terms                                  the number of years on the mortgage<br /> <br /> Purchase price                                    what was paid for this property<br /> <br /> Purchase date                                     when the Landlord purchased the property<br /> <br /> Monthly repayment amount              how much the Landlord is repaying on this property<br /> <br /> === Utility providers ===<br /> [[File:Utility Providers.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout allows you to store the current utility providers that service this property.<br /> <br /> === Inventory ===<br /> [[File:Inventory.png|none|thumb|330x330px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If a property has items that within it that the Landlord has agreed that the tenant can use, this section will record those items<br /> [[File:Inventory Details.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> Please note: You must have a Dropbox or Google Drive account configured if you wish to upload files.<br /> <br /> <br /> Room              which room is the item in<br /> <br /> Item Name      name of the item<br /> <br /> Condition        what condition is it in<br /> <br /> Quantity          how many of these item(s)<br /> <br /> Value               value of the item(s)<br /> <br /> Notes              additional notes<br /> <br /> <br /> Example:<br /> [[File:Inventory Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Inventory print ====<br /> [[File:Inventory Print.png|none|thumb]]<br /> The report will be shown in a new tab in your browser, allowing you to print either onto paper or to a PDF document.<br /> <br /> === Repairs – recording, assigning and invoicing ===<br /> [[File:Repairs.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> When a tenant contacts your branch to report a repair in this tab you can record the repair, then you can allocate this repair to a contractor. Once a contractor has undertaken the repair, an invoice can then be raised.<br /> <br /> ==== Adding a repair ====<br /> [[File:Adding a Repair.png|900px|thumb|none|alt=Adding a repair to a rental property|Adding a repair to a rental property]]<br /> This form will allow you to record the repair whilst your tenant in on the phone or in branch:<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection<br /> [[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb|275x275px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here                                                        <br /> [[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb|335x335px]]<br />                                                            By clicking Create contact a new tab will open in your browser<br /> <br /> <br /> Date reported                                   the date tenant reports the issue(s)<br /> <br /> Reported to                                       the staff member logging the report<br /> <br /> Date passed to contractor              date the staff member passes to the contractor<br /> <br /> Date to be fixed                                date quoted by the contractor<br /> <br /> Date fixed                                          date of the actual repair<br /> <br /> Contact method                               how did the tenant contact you – phone/visit?<br /> <br /> Description of problem                   full description of this repair/issue<br /> <br /> Addition staff notes                         any internal staff note<br /> <br /> Quoted cost                                      quoted cost by the contractor<br /> <br /> Fixed cost                                          the actual cost (if different than the quote)<br /> <br /> Send repair to contractor by SMS           Send the details (either creating or editing) to a contractor by SMS (you MUST enter the contractors mobile address) AND have SMS credit<br /> <br /> Signed off by tenant / agent           work completed and accepted by tenant<br /> <br /> <br /> Once this has been saved, you will need to re-edit this repair, to enter additional details, costs, change of contractor.<br /> [[File:RepairNew.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ===== Updating the repair =====<br /> [[File:Updating a Repair to a rental property.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> Having chosen (or even amended the contractor), update the repair with any further details such as quoted date, cost or additional information relevant to the repair.<br /> <br /> ===== Send details to the contractor =====<br /> [[File:Send Details To Contractor.png|none|thumb|527x527px]]<br /> The above is the Master Letter but you can duplicate and amend this letter (Administration/Letter templates). By choosing Email, when you click the Go button, Standout will queue and send your letter by email to the contractor.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Once the repair has been completed, update the repair with the final details<br /> [[File:Update Repair.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> Click on Save and then Save Property, both saves are required prior to raising an invoice to the Landlord.<br /> <br /> ===== Invoicing the Landlord =====<br /> [[File:Invoice Landlord.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> Simply click the Invoice landlord which will then raise an invoice, to view invoices, if you go to Rental Agreements and then Financials you will then be able to see the invoice in the transactions list<br /> [[File:Invoice List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Print an invoice to the Landlord (or Tenant) – for this example we will choose the Finders Fee transaction<br /> <br /> <br /> Click Actions then Print Invoice<br /> [[File:Print Invoice.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> Whilst you can select either, it best to use Landlord Invoice for Landlords and Tenant Invoice for Tenants.<br /> <br /> ===== Printing the invoice =====<br /> [[File:Print Invoice 2.png|none|thumb]]<br /> You can either print the Letter, Email or both, choose your option then click Go. If you’ve configured a file storage provider, copies are stored in the Files tab in the property.<br /> <br /> === Recurring payments ===<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> These payments generate a payment request to the tenant, and are intended to be used for things like extra car parking space, gardening services, window cleaning etc, automatically applied to active agreements and can be seen in the Financials tab<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a recurring payment ====<br /> [[File:Create Recurring Payment.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Enabled                                               to save deleting payments, Enable or Disable as required<br /> <br /> Details of recurring payment              Details of the payment<br /> <br /> Recurring amount                               How much is the payment required from the tenant<br /> <br /> Frequency period                               How often do you need an invoice raising<br /> <br /> Day of payment                                  Which Day (Sunday-Saturay)<br /> <br /> Subject to VAT                                    Does the amount include VAT<br /> <br /> ===== Recurring payment example =====<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments Example.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> <br /> ===== Recurring payment example in Financials =====<br /> [[File:Recurring Payments in Financials.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> To print or email a copy of the invoice to the tenant, just click Actions then choose Print Invoice.<br /> <br /> === Service appointments ===<br /> [[File:Service Appointments.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when an appliance requires a service, such as a boiler, fire alarm, burglar alarm or anything else.<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a service appointment ====<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any service appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.[[File:Create A Service Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor type                                a  list of contractors for selection<br /> [[File:Contractor List.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Contractor                                         a list of contractors you’ve created, if you haven’t got a contractor entered, you can enter one here<br /> [[File:Contractor Selection.png|none|thumb]]<br />                                                            <br /> <br /> Subject of the service appointment   This is the subject line of the email that will be sent<br /> <br /> Details of service appointment          Details of the service appointment<br /> <br /> Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property<br /> <br /> Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property<br /> <br /> ===== Service appointment example =====<br /> [[File:Service Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> === Rent review appointments ===<br /> [[File:Rent Review Appointments.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> These appointments are an easy way to create a diary appointment when arranging a rental price review with the current tenant.<br /> <br /> ==== Creating a rent review appointment ====<br /> [[File:Create Rent Review Appointment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject of the appointment               This is the subject line of the email that will be sent<br /> <br /> Details of appointment                       Details of the rent review appointment<br /> <br /> Date of the appointment                    When the contractor is required at the rental property<br /> <br /> Time of appointment                          What time is the contractor expected at the rental property<br /> <br /> ===== Rent review appointment example =====<br /> [[File:Rent Review Appointment Example.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> === Occupants ===<br /> [[File:Occupants.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]<br /> This section is to record those occupants under 18 years of age that may need to be recorded. An occupant can only be added to a property whilst there is a tenancy agreement in place<br /> <br /> ==== Adding an occupant ====<br /> [[File:Adding an Occupant.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Enter their Name, Gender, Date of birth and any notes that need to be stored, clicking Save will either add a new occupant or update an existing one.<br /> <br /> == Rental Mode - Fully Managed ==<br /> <br /> <br /> This document will assume that you’ve created a new property, linked it to a Landlord, placed it on the market and have now found a tenant for said property.<br /> <br /> <br /> Throughout this process, Standout will offer to create Letters to send to all parties concerned. These will be stored against the property and will allow them to be printed and/or emailed. Side note – all Letters can be amended in Administration / Letters.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once your potential client has visited the property (Book Viewing) and offers a rental figure, open the property and select the Viewing / offer tab.<br /> <br /> <br /> You’ll see all the viewings and offers. Select your client, click Make offer (print/email appropriate letter) you will then see<br /> [[File:Viewings And Offers.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Click the Accept offer and a warning will appear near the top/centre of your screen<br /> [[File:Accept Offer.png|none|thumb|480x480px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You can print/email or both when producing letters, click Go to print your documents for each of the contacts (Standout creates docx documents).<br /> <br /> <br /> Once complete, click the Back to Property button near the bottom of the screen.<br /> <br /> <br /> The property is now at the status of “Under offer”<br /> <br /> <br /> Once under offer and you’ve completed all the necessary credit checks, obtained the deposit from the tenant, you can then create the tenancy agreement.<br /> <br /> === Creating the tenancy agreement ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> SMS text messages can be sent to the tenant, this can be from one to seven days before the rent being due. This option is reliant on one of three configuration settings, a valid email and/or a valid mobile number on the tenant record and SMS credits will need to be purchased, for more information see the Administration Manual and/or the system in Administration / Branch / SMS.<br /> <br /> <br /> Please see below where to configure these settings in an agreement.<br /> [[File:Property Actions.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Click More actions and then choose the Rental agreements option to continue<br /> <br /> === Agreements ===<br /> [[File:Agreements.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If any older agreements exist, they will be listed on the left side of the screen and can be viewed. To create an agreement, all the required information will be on the right side of the screen:<br /> [[File:Agreement Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Agreement Details ====<br /> <br /> <br /> Within Agreement details, the following information needs to be input:<br /> <br /> <br /> Agreement Date                     the date the agreement is created<br /> <br /> Reference                               a unique reference for this tenancy agreement<br /> <br /> Let period                               Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly/Annually/Per 4 Weeks/Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> Initial Period (Monthly)          the amount of time (in months) the tenancy is for (eg: 6/12/18/24)<br /> <br /> Start Date                                the date the Tenant moves into the property<br /> <br /> End Date                                 the date that the agreement ends<br /> <br /> Rolling Contract                      if both Landlord and Tenant agrees to a rolling contract set this option to Yes, otherwise No for the contact to end<br /> <br /> Auto Update Tenancy             change the Tenants address automatically from the one<br /> <br /> Address                                   entered on the system, with the address of this property.<br /> <br /> Let Price                                  the price the Tenant will pay during the tenancy<br /> <br /> Bond Price                               the price of the Bond that will be paid and transferred to your Deposit Holding Scheme<br /> <br /> Finders Fee                             the amount you charge a Landlord for arranging a tenancy<br /> <br /> First Payment Due                  the first date when payments are due<br /> <br /> Payment Terms                       the number of days when a payment becomes overdue<br /> <br /> Day to pay Landlord               when you are due to pay the Landlord his part of a tenancy Payment<br /> <br /> Send a rent reminder             If you choose to send the tenant a rent reminder, you can<br /> <br /> Choose between 0 (disabled) up to 7 days prior<br /> <br /> Send rent reminder by           How to send the reminder – Disabled / Email / SMS&lt;sup&gt;*&lt;/sup&gt;<br /> <br /> Tenancy deposit Scheme        which scheme you have signed to<br /> <br /> Deposit Scheme reference     reference for this bond payment<br /> <br /> Additional Clauses                  any addition clauses that may be outside of the written<br /> <br /> tenancy agreement<br /> <br /> <br /> Note – Rent reminder emails can be customised by go to Administration/Email templates and duplicate the master version for your own agent version.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;nowiki&gt;*&lt;/nowiki&gt; SMS messages will only be sent if there is sufficient credit on your account (to check this go to Administration / Branch / Branch Name then the SMS tab<br /> <br /> ==== Initial Inspection Visit ====<br /> [[File:Initial Inspection.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> If you have visited the property prior to this can be recorded here.<br /> <br /> ==== Guarantor ====<br /> [[File:Guarantor.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> If you require a tenant to provide a guarantor, once you’ve added their details into the system, you can start typing their first name will appear in this area to link to this agreement.<br /> <br /> ==== Fee details ====<br /> [[File:Fee Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This is the amount you take from the rental amount to pay for your services. This can be a fixed amount or a Percentage. Fees will be applied on either the due date of the tenants payment or when the tenant actually pays that periods rent.<br /> <br /> <br /> Staff details<br /> [[File:Staff Details.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Select a member of Staff to enter all diary appointment and reminders to. This does not have to be the member of staff creating the agreement.<br /> <br /> <br /> === Meter readings ===<br /> [[File:Meter Readings.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> ==== Start of Tenancy ====<br /> Compete all those know fields prior to the tenant moving in, if you have that information to hand.<br /> <br /> ==== During Tenancy ====<br /> Throughout the tenancy you can add meter readings, click the Record readings button. Then choose the date the meter readings were provided by your tenant. You must enter at least 1 meter reading for the information to be recorded. They can be either Gas, Electricity, Water or Oil. Once you have entered at least one set of meter readings, all readings will be displayed in a table. Should you enter the wrong information, you can delete those details by clicking and confirming your deletion request.<br /> <br /> Once all the information has been completed, click Create agreement<br /> <br /> === Creating the Tenancy Agreement ===<br /> [[File:Create The Tenancy Agreement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> Upon successful creation of a tenancy agreement the system will take you to the Letter section. There will be a selection of pre-defined and user-defined letters available. Prior to using the system, we recommend that you create agency specific documents, especially tenancy agreements.<br /> <br /> <br /> The default (Master) documents are:<br /> <br />            Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement<br /> <br />            Assured Shorthold Tenancy Agreement – ROOM<br /> <br />            Rental Agreement<br /> <br />            Standing Order Mandate<br /> <br /> ==== Rental Agreement (Master – example) ====<br /> [[File:Rental Agreement Letter.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Click Go to create the documents (they will download to your computer)<br /> <br /> Click the Back to Property button and all the created documents will be placed in the Files linked to this property.<br /> <br /> === Financials ===<br /> [[File:Financials.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> You will see two transactions, an invoice to the Landlord for the Finders Fee and a Bond request for the Tenant pay.<br /> <br /> ==== Bond payment ====<br /> <br /> <br /> The first payment to be registered on the system, is the Tenants payment of their Bond<br /> [[File:Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> Direction                     From a Tenant/Landlord<br /> <br />                                    To a Tenant/Landlord<br /> <br /> Party                           Landlord/Tenant/Other for tenant<br /> <br /> Payment Method        Cash / Bacs / Cheque / Card<br /> <br /> Payment Type             Rent / Other / Bond<br /> <br /> Amount                       Amount being paid<br /> <br /> Date                            Date of the transaction<br /> <br /> Reference                   Reference of the payment (free form text)<br /> <br /> Description                 a free form description of the transaction<br /> [[File:BP2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> You will see that the system has automatically assigned the Bond payment to the Bond request and is marked as Paid.<br /> <br /> <br /> The current status of our tenanted property now shows the Financials as<br /> [[File:Financials After Bond Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]] <br /> <br /> We explained earlier in this document how to create an invoice (and a recurring invoice) to the tenant and the landlord, they now show as unpaid. In our scenario (which will probably never occur – but, so that we can show transactions in this document) is that the tenant received keys, started to move in and then subsequently lost them, the Landlord agreed in good faith to pay half so we have raised an invoice to the Landlord for £100 for the contractors fee and then an invoice to the tenant for £50 as they split the bill. <br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Tenant Rent payment ====<br /> <br /> <br /> We will record a payment of the Tenants first month’s rent on the 10/04/20 within the Bulk Payment section – for how to do this and see how to use Bulk Payments, please see the Bulk Payments Document. We also paid the outstanding tenant invoice for the locksmith.<br /> [[File:Tenant Rent Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> Our tenant does not owe any monies as all payments, rent due and invoices have now been completed.<br /> <br /> ==== Landlord payment ====<br /> Depending on how you have configured the agreement, the payment to the Landlord will either be due now, or after a number of days (we configured it for 2 days from receiving payment). In our example, the Landlord is now due a payment of £247.87.<br /> [[File:Landlord Payment.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Financials statement ====<br /> [[File:Financials Statement.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> The financials statement shows that all parties are even (no payments due) but, two invoices show that they have not been paid. As this is incorrect, simply choose Actions and click “Mark paid” to both of them<br /> [[File:Financials Statement2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> Now all figures and financial lines are correct.<br /> <br /> <br /> ==== Landlord statement ====<br /> Should a Landlord with to obtain a statement from you, all you need to do, is choose from the following<br /> [[File:Landlord Statement 1.png|none|thumb|368x368px]]<br /> <br /> Select the chosen Date range and click Generate statement<br /> [[File:Landlord Statement 2.png|none|thumb|943x943px]]<br /> <br /> You can then either Download Statement or Email PDF to contact depending on your requirements.<br /> <br /> === Emailing all tenants ===<br /> When editing a Shared property (HMO), you can now email all the tenants with a current agreement. Simply click More actions and then Email all tenants button<br /> [[File:Email All Tenants.png|none|thumb|940x940px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Simply add a subject and email body, click Send email and all tenants that have supplied an email address will receive the email. This could be used when tenants need to be informed of communal area repairs or disruptions.<br /> <br /> = Rent Reminder Email Template =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> To amend the template, go to Administration / Email Templates tab<br /> <br /> When customising your own email, ensure that you click the “Duplicate” button before editing, once you’ve completed your changes, click “Save email”.<br /> <br /> You can change the wording of this email, but you must ensure that you keep the field names within {} the same, otherwise, the system will not replace them correctly for your tenant details.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Staff_visits&diff=550 2021-11-25T15:45:24Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Staff Visits */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>= Staff Visits =<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> When you are editing a property, at the bottom of the screen you can click “Book viewing” (or click More actions and the choose &quot;Book viewing&quot; in the menu), you are able to select Contact or Staff. This overview is specifically for Staff bookings.<br /> <br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (click the Login to Office 365 button on your Dashboard), any appointments created in Standout will automatically be added to your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit an appointment in Outlook Calendar but in the Standout Diary.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> You can book a staff viewing/appointment for either yourself or other members of your branch.<br /> <br /> == Book viewing ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Click on the “Book viewing” from within a property<br /> [[File:Staff Visits 1.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Choose the staff member that will be visiting the property, then either choose the date and double click the time slot or click “Book staff viewing” to then enter all the dates manually.<br /> [[File:Staff Visits 2.png|none|thumb|556x556px]]<br /> <br /> == Viewing details ==<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Subject            can be amended to read a more meaningful subject, for example “Inspection viewing at ‘address’”<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Location          the address of the property (if applicable)<br /> <br /> <br /> Branch             the branch associated with the appointment<br /> <br /> Category         can be chosen from the following options “Inspection / Inventory / Measure Up / Photos / Staff visit. Note: each option will be displayed in the diary with Its own colour assigned to it<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Start Date        Start date for the visit<br /> <br /> Start Time       Time for the visit<br /> <br /> All day             tick if it is an all-day event<br /> <br /> End Date         End date for the visit (usually the same as the Start Date)<br /> <br /> End Time         by default, 30 minutes<br /> <br /> <br /> Reminder        None by default but can be configured to pop up x minutes prior<br /> <br /> <br /> Notes              a consolidation of the staff / property<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Email owner    Send an email to the owner/landlord that an appointment has been arranged.<br /> <br /> <br /> Email tenant   IF the property is tenanted, you can send the tenant an email that an Appointment has been arranged.<br /> <br /> <br /> SMS tenant     IF the property is tenanted AND Mobile number has been entered, finally, you will need to have SMS credits to send the tenant a text message.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Click “Create appointment<br /> <br /> <br /> = Email Templates =<br /> <br /> <br /> To amend an email template, choose “Administration” then “Email templates”.<br /> <br /> <br /> The “Master” versions will be available as:<br /> <br /> <br /> Property inspection appointment (Staff)<br /> <br /> Property inspection appointment (Tenant)<br /> <br /> Property inspection appointment (Vendor/Landlord)<br /> <br /> <br /> Property inventory appointment (Staff)<br /> <br /> Property inventory appointment (Tenant)<br /> <br /> Property inventory appointment (Vendor/Landlord)<br /> <br /> <br /> Property measure up appointment (Staff)<br /> <br /> Property measure up appointment (Tenant)<br /> <br /> Property measure up appointment (Vendor/Landlord)<br /> <br /> <br /> Property photo appointment (Staff)<br /> <br /> Property photo appointment (Tenant)<br /> <br /> Property photo appointment (Vendor/Landlord)<br /> <br /> <br /> Property staff visit appointment (Staff)<br /> <br /> Property staff visit appointment (Tenant)<br /> <br /> Property staff visit appointment (Vendor/Landlord)<br /> <br /> == Staff emails ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The general text for an email to a staff member is<br /> <br /> <br /> Hi {FirstName}<br /> <br /> A property inspection appointment has been booked for you to attend, the details of which can be found below.<br /> <br /> == Tenant emails ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The general text for an email to a tenant is<br /> <br /> <br /> Dear {Title} {Surname},<br /> <br /> <br /> A property inspection appointment for the property you are renting has been booked, the details of which can be found below.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Vendor/Landlord emails ==<br /> <br /> <br /> The general text for an email to the Vendor/Landlord<br /> <br /> <br /> Dear {Title} {Surname} <br /> <br /> A property inspection appointment for your property has been booked, the details of which can be found below. This email is normally sent to inform you of an inspection, and as such, requires no action on your part. However, should you wish to query this, please contact our office.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_Rental_Property&diff=549 2021-11-25T15:36:02Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Book Valuation */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Getting Started – Adding a new Rental Property ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout has been designed to market and manage a property, either with No management whatsoever, rent collection or fully managed.<br /> <br /> === Guided Mode ===<br /> Standout by default works in guided mode. Meaning property statuses will be shown in the order of what is expected. For example, when a property is created the only status available would be “Pre Valuation”, in free mode, all properties statues are display.<br /> <br /> <br /> This part of the help system will describe the following:<br /> <br /> * Adding a property on the system including assigning a new Landlord and all the tabs associated with a property (both Sales/Rentals).<br /> * Booking a valuation<br /> * Accepting the valuation<br /> * Making the property available<br /> * Creating an applicant<br /> * Booking a viewing<br /> * Making an offer<br /> * Adding a second tenant<br /> * Creating an agreement<br /> * How Financials work<br /> * Tabs<br /> <br /> Displayed above the property details, tab elements will be shown (and hidden) depending on a property contract etc. These tabs will allow different sections to be shown. We recommend that if you’ve amended information in a tab, press Save property before proceeding.<br /> <br /> ==== Identification ====<br /> The first area to be completed should be the property header information, this would be a unique reference (either type your own or allow the system to generate one), select the branch (if applicable), date the property can be marketed and if you’re going to market this property as a “Featured” property on your website and/or Portals, this can be changed at a later date if required.<br /> <br /> ==== Address ====<br /> Next enter the address details of the property, enter the Postcode of the property – if that Postcode exists in our database, either partial details will be populated or a drop down list of all the known addresses will be available for selection. Once selected, the data will be populated into the address fields – if you wish to edit these fields, you can do so at any time. If known/required, the local council can be selected for this property. If for any reason the address is not picked up from the post code then you will need to enter the full address manually.<br /> <br /> <br /> If you subscribe to the Zoopla portal for Display Address to be recognised by Zoopla, it must have 3 sections, by default this would be the “Road Name, Town, First part of the Postcode” ie “High Street, Town, M26”.<br /> <br /> <br /> Mapping is an integral part of Standout and property searching, a properties Latitude and Longitude will be returned but, if you wish to move the marker on Google Maps, then use the Set Map button to move the marker to the required spot, clicking Close will then update the Latitude/Longitude accordingly.<br /> <br /> <br /> As above, the Streetview can also be amended but, please be aware that Google may not have mapped new houses/estates so a close location may have to be chosen until their views have been updated. Once you’re happy with the view of the property, click close to save the amendments. Additionally, you can turn this option off by settings the Include street view to No.<br /> <br /> === Owners ===<br /> <br /> ==== Current Owners ====<br /> As this is a new property, No owners selected will be displayed.<br /> <br /> ==== Add Owner ====<br /> When you start typing a name (at least two characters), existing contacts within Standout will be displayed. To add a new contact, click the link “Create a new contact”<br /> <br /> ==== Adding a new landlord ====<br /> Enter the landlords’ details in this new tab. The minimum amount of information needed to complete this task are:<br /> <br />            Title<br /> <br />            First name<br /> <br />            Surname<br /> <br />            Contact type – by default Landlord will be ticked (or checked)<br /> <br />            Telephone or Mobile number<br /> <br />            Email address – we believe this to be the most important as Standout can email contacts important letters, notices, and general emails.<br /> <br />            If the Landlord is a Company, enter the company name.<br /> <br />            Address – address where the Landlord resides or their business address.<br /> <br /> Once you’ve clicked Create contact, you can close this tab and return to the Add owners to enter the name details of your new landlord.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple landlords for a property, you will need to repeat this process. Where multiple landlords exist, a primary can be selected.<br /> <br /> == Basics ==<br /> <br /> === Contract ===<br /> The basic information refers to the contract and property information. Contracts that can be chosen are “For Sale/To Let/Auction”. For this example, we’re choosing “To Let” (each option displays and hides options for that contract.<br /> <br /> === Managed ===<br /> Managed options are “No/Rent Collection/Yes”, for this document, “Yes” will be selected.<br /> <br /> === Class ===<br /> Classification is the type of property being Let, “Residential/Commercial/Business”, “Residential” will be selected.<br /> <br /> === New Build ===<br /> Pertaining to the property itself, is this classed as a New Build Property, either Yes or No.<br /> <br /> === Tenure ===<br /> Is the Tenure of the building “Freehold/Leasehold/Commonhold/Share of Freehold/Flying Freehold/Share Transfer”.<br /> <br /> === Residential type ===<br /> A list of available residential property types, based upon the rules given by Rightmove.<br /> <br /> === Property style ===<br /> The type of property – “Detached/Link Detached/Semi Detached/Terrace”, based upon the rules given by Rightmove.<br /> <br /> === Year built ===<br /> The year (if known) the building was built.<br /> <br /> === Bedrooms ===<br /> How many bedrooms has the property? This is required!<br /> <br /> === Bathrooms ===<br /> How many bathrooms has the property? This is required!<br /> <br /> === Reception rooms ===<br /> How many reception rooms as the property? This is required!<br /> <br /> == Price ==<br /> Should your Landlord already have prices for their property, this section will allow you to enter those figures. However, this section can be left blank until you’ve visited the property and completed a valuation.<br /> <br /> === Currency ===<br /> If you’ve configured Standout for multiple currencies, then you will have the option to choose, otherwise, it will be the standard (£ GBP).<br /> <br /> === Flash ===<br /> A message displayed on your website, generally on the main photograph of the property.<br /> <br /> === Let price ===<br /> The amount of the rental<br /> <br /> === Price qualifier ===<br /> Choose from the list of available qualifiers<br /> <br /> === Post price message ===<br /> A free text box to enter a message after the price on your website<br /> <br /> === Let period ===<br /> When will the rent be due – Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly/Annually/Per 4 Weeks/Per Person Per Week<br /> <br /> === Bond price ===<br /> Known to some as a deposit – the bond should be paid by the tenant prior to their agreement start and held in your deposit scheme provider.<br /> <br /> == Fees ==<br /> <br /> === Contractual arrangement ===<br /> The options available are Joint Agency/Multiple Agency/Sole Agency” and are set whether the Landlord has the property marketed by yourselves and/or other agencies.<br /> <br /> === Contractual fee split ===<br /> When not a Sole agency, you can select how the fees will be split between the agencies.<br /> <br /> === Management Fee ===<br /> How much will be charged to the Landlord for your services, either a percentage of the rent or a fixed fee.<br /> <br /> === Finders Fee ===<br /> If you charge a Landlord for finding a tenant(s), then enter the fee.<br /> <br /> === Other agency name/Contractual details ===<br /> These fields will be displayed when not a sole agency for you to enter the information.<br /> <br /> <br /> Once the above has been completed, click the Save property. Any errors will be shown at the top of the display and will need to be resolved before a successful save.<br /> <br /> == Book Valuation ==<br /> When editing your recently entered property, you can click the button, located at the lower right of the screen OR in the More actions menu.<br /> <br /> <br /> When clicked, you will be shown the Diary view, normally showing the current working week, choose the day/time when you will visit the property and double click the time slot – e.g. Wednesday at 6pm.<br /> <br /> <br /> The appointment form will be displayed, showing pre-populated information, including a small google map showing the property location. Should you wish to change anything, you can at this point.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> If you are NOT visiting but a colleague, you can choose their details in the drop down select for “For” otherwise, your name will be displayed. If you&#039;ve logged into Office 365, this appointment will be created in the Outlook Calendar for the attendee.<br /> <br /> <br /> You can then choose whether to email the owner, if you do, click so a tick appears, they will receive an email confirming your visit.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Letter selection&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> As you’ve booked a valuation, Standout has master letters available for you to create and either email or download/print. They are:<br /> <br /> *            Potential Listing Sheet<br /> *            Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist<br /> *            Valuation Appointment<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;All the above can be duplicated and personalised in the Administration/Letter Templates section.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> If none are required, click “Back to property without creating letter” at the bottom.<br /> <br /> == Property Status Update ==<br /> As you’ve booked a valuation appointment, the property now has a status of “Awaiting Decision”. The only other status available is “Cancelled” should a Landlord wish not to use your services.<br /> <br /> == Confirm/reschedule valuation ==<br /> Once you’ve valued the property, you can then use this option to either:<br /> <br /> *            Confirm the information<br /> *            Reschedule a new valuation appointment<br /> <br /> === Confirming the valuation ===<br /> Edit the property and choose either “Confirm/Reschedule valuation” at the bottom of the screen, or the matching button on the “More actions” menu.<br /> <br /> === Contractual Agreement ===<br /> Confirm the agreement – Sole Agency/Joint Agency/Multiple Agency.<br /> <br /> === Managed ===<br /> Taken from the previous screen, this should match your previous choice – for this document, Yes is chosen.<br /> <br /> === Let period ===<br /> Taken from the previous screen, this should match your previous choice – for this document, Monthly is chosen.<br /> <br /> === Initial Market Price ===<br /> Enter the valuation price that you feel is the market value, the minimum and maximum that you feel your agency would accept.<br /> <br /> === Fee ===<br /> The period fee your agency charges, which will be either a fixed fee or a percentage.<br /> <br /> === Finders fee ===<br /> The fee you charge to the landlord for finding a tenant<br /> <br /> === Bond price ===<br /> The amount required to hold in the deposit scheme until the end of the tenancy.<br /> <br /> === Valuation Advice ===<br /> A text box to allow you to enter any additional information that you feel the landlord should be aware of.<br /> <br /> === Cancel ===<br /> If you want to stop doing this and return to the property<br /> <br /> === Reschedule valuation appointment ===<br /> Ignore all the above if the appointment did not occur and you wish to reschedule.<br /> <br /> === Confirm valuation ===<br /> Save the information provided and return to the property.<br /> <br /> === Letter Production ===<br /> You will be offered the option to create a letter stating your valuation details, which allows you to amend, along with your agency terms and conditions.<br /> <br /> <br /> As with all letters created in Standout, Document will download a Word document, Email will email it to your landlord (subject to an email address in the landlords’ details) or Both.<br /> <br /> <br /> If you do not wish to create the letter, choose “&lt;- Back to property without creating letters”.<br /> <br /> == Property Status Update ==<br /> As you have now completed the above, the property status should now be set to “Valuation Confirmed”. Available statuses from this dropdown are “On hold/Available/Withdrawn/Valuation Confirmed”.<br /> <br /> == Additional information prior to placing a property on the market ==<br /> Before placing a property on the market, the more information provided regarding the property, the more likely a property will either be sold or let.<br /> <br /> == Secondary details ==<br /> Various fields that are self-explanatory but to help:<br /> <br /> === Agency specific features ===<br /> You can select entries from the drop-down list (items such as Children considered, Cul-de-sac, Double Glazed etc). This list is editable in the Administration part of the system.<br /> <br /> === Additional features ===<br /> Floors                                      select from the list provided<br /> <br /> Usual entrance floor               select from the list provided<br /> <br /> Parking                                    select from the list provided<br /> <br /> Assigned parking space(s)      enter the details regarding the space(s)<br /> <br /> Heating                                   enter the details<br /> <br /> Accessibility                            enter the details<br /> <br /> Outside space                         enter the details<br /> <br /> Burglar alarm                          Yes/No<br /> <br /> Dishwasher                             Yes/No<br /> <br /> Smoke Alarm                          Yes/No<br /> <br /> Carbon monoxide alarm         Yes/No<br /> <br /> === Inside Area/Land area ===<br /> Enter the areas and Standout can convert between feet/Yards/Meter squared/Acres/Hectares<br /> <br /> === Running costs ===<br /> Rates information                   enter the details<br /> <br /> Council tax band                     select from the list provided<br /> <br /> === Utilities ===<br /> Average gas cost                     enter the amount (if known)<br /> <br /> Average electricity cost          enter the amount (if known)<br /> <br /> Average water rates               enter the amount (if known)<br /> <br /> <br /> === Annual fees ===<br /> Ground rent fee                      if applicable<br /> <br /> Estate management fee         if applicable<br /> <br /> Insurance fees                        if applicable<br /> <br /> === Descriptions ===<br /> &#039;&#039;Brief description&#039;&#039;          It&#039;s important to include a brief description, as this is often what is shown on your own website—and on portals—before someone clicks to view more details.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Full description           &#039;&#039; It may be thought that the full description will be used to enter a complete and thorough description of the property, rooms, outside and any other information pertinent to the property. And whilst this is true, we recommend using the Floors &amp; rooms (see below for further information) to fully describe these rooms.<br /> <br /> <br /> Bullet points                Add up to 20 bullet points regarding the property<br /> <br /> <br /> Floors &amp; rooms           You can detail the property using floors and rooms, this will allow you to enter a floor or room name, the dimensions, a detailed description, up to four photographs and if required, for that room to be excluded from a brochure. <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Please note: photographs should be uploaded prior, in the Media tab.&#039;&#039; <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Default rooms &amp; floors can be created in “Administration/Branch/Default rooms” – such as Agency notes etc.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br />                                   <br /> <br />   An example would be:<br /> <br /> *                                    Ground floor<br /> *                                    Front Garden (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Entrance hall (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Reception (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Dining room (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Kitchen (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Conservatory (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    First floor<br /> *                                    Hallway (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Bedroom One (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    En-suite (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Bedroom Two (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Bedroom Three (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Bathroom (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Rear Garden (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Garden studio (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Garage (giving a description/photo/dimensions)<br /> *                                    Agency Notes (place your notes in the description)<br /> <br /> <br /> === Additional descriptions ===<br /> Directions &#039;&#039;      &#039;&#039;             By clicking the Directions button, Standout will calculate the<br /> <br /> directions from your branch office to property.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Location                      Enter any additional information regarding the property location, not entered in either the descriptions or rooms &amp; floors.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Vendor View/Opinion Enter additional information provided by the landlord/vendor regarding the property.<br /> <br /> === Media ===<br /> <br /> ==== General media ====<br /> Photographs                upload all the property photos and order them how you’d like them to be viewed online<br /> <br />            Brochure Media          order the photos if different from above<br /> <br />            Floor plans                  upload floorplans into this section<br /> <br />            Floorplan URL              If the floorplan is hosted by a 3&lt;sup&gt;rd&lt;/sup&gt; party<br /> <br />            Video URL                   If you’ve a video on YouTube etc, paste the URL here<br /> <br /> == Rental ==<br /> <br /> === Rental options ===<br /> <br /> <br /> Shared Property                      this document does not go into HMO properties, see our document “Marketing HMO properties”<br /> <br /> ==== Rental Features           ====<br /> Let type                       select from the drop-down list<br /> <br /> Furnished                    select from the drop-down list<br /> <br /> Minimum Term           enter the minimum length the landlord is prepared to accept<br /> <br /> Contract length           enter the contract length<br /> <br /> Pets allowed                Yes/No<br /> <br /> Smokers considered    Yes/No<br /> <br /> Benefits considered    Yes/No<br /> <br /> Sharers considered     Yes/No<br /> <br /> Rent includes              Up to 1000 characters describing any additional inclusions<br /> <br /> <br /> Bills included               Self-explanatory Yes/No options included within the rental amount<br /> <br /> === Property finance information ===<br /> Mortgaged property               Yes/No<br /> <br />                                                If the landlord wishes for you to know this information, you can record Mortgage Provider, term, price, date, monthly repayment.<br /> <br /> ==== Utility providers ====<br /> Gas/Electricity/Water             Select from a list of providers (if known)<br /> <br /> <br /> Inventory &#039;&#039;                               &#039;&#039; Add inventory items that will be in the property at the start of the tenancy recording  - room, item name, condition, quantity, value, additional notes and a photograph<br /> <br /> <br /> Repairs                                    Once a tenancy in active, you can report a repair and allocate a contractor. Selecting contractor type, contractor, date reported, report to, date passed to contractor, date to be fixed, date fixed, contact method (how the tenant reported the repair), details of the problem, additional staff notes (internal only), quoted cost, fixed cost, signed off by agent/tenant.<br /> <br /> <br /> Recurring payments                These payments generate a payment request to the tenant, and are intended to be used for things like extra car parking space, gardening services, window cleaning etc, automatically applied to active agreements and can be seen in the Financials<br /> <br /> tab<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Service appointments             These are appointments for services that are booked for this property.<br /> <br /> <br /> Rent reviews                           These are rent review appointments that are booked for this property.<br /> <br /> === Certificates ===<br /> EPC                                          If the EPC is required, you can upload a certificate, otherwise, choose the EEC and EEP values to then Generate EPC certificate for the property. Also, when you place the expiry date into Standout, a diary appointment will be created on that date reminding you about its expiry.<br /> <br /> <br /> Additional Certificates             enter the Certificate reference, expiry date and if you hold a copy, select copy held. As above, an expiry date reminder will be created.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;** Whilst there are other tabs, this guide will now skip them as they are covered in the property help guide **&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> == Placing the property on the Market ==<br /> When your landlord confirms your valuation, you will need to edit the property to place the property online to start promoting:<br /> <br /> === Important fields ===<br />            Let price                      set the let price to what has been agreed<br /> <br />            Status                          change to Available<br /> <br /> <br />            Click the Save Property button<br /> <br /> <br />            Letter production        a letter named “Property On Market” can be created, if<br /> <br /> Required, and downloaded, emailed or both.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Depending on the date you have specified in “Date available” the property will either go live as of that date or, if the date is in the future, the property will not be uploaded to any website or portal until that date.&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> == Money Laundering ==<br /> If you’ve configured Money Laundering (Administration/Branch/Money Laundering provider) you will have 30 days to obtain relevant documentation (see Contact/Money Laundering to record identification).<br /> <br /> == Booking a viewing ==<br /> When a potential tenant contacts your agency regarding the property, you will need to input their details onto Standout. Ensure that you choose “Applicant/Tenant”, enter their email and current address. This will ensure you can select them when booking the viewing.<br /> <br /> === How to book a viewing ===<br /> <br /> <br /> <br />            Contact           click More Actions / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant and if the Landlord confirmed.<br /> <br /> <br />            Contact list      click Edit / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant and if the Landlord confirmed.<br /> <br /> <br />            Property list     click Edit / Book viewing / Quick search property / Choose the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant and if the Landlord confirmed.<br /> <br /> <br />            Property          click the button “Book viewing“ or “More actions / Book viewing” – you can choose to either book a tenant viewing appointment or a staff viewing appointment (for yourself or another member of staff). Choose the tenant and the appointment date/time and whether to email Owner/Tenant and if the Landlord confirmed.<br /> <br /> == Viewings/Offers ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Once a viewing has occurred, you can update viewing details. To do this, edit the property, choose tab “Viewing / offers”.  For simplicity, we will continue with the tenant making an offer to progress the property to a Let state and creating a tenancy agreement.<br /> <br /> <br /> Options available when updating a past viewing are:<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Book viewing&#039;&#039;                                      book a subsequent viewing (if required)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Add viewer feedback&#039;&#039;                          if the viewer has given feedback, enter it here<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Send feedback request email&#039;&#039;              send an email to a viewer asking for feedback<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;Make offer     &#039;&#039;                                     enter offer details given by viewer<br /> <br /> == Making an offer ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Enter the offer made by the viewer (for rentals this is usually the asking price), you can select their financial position, if there are any additional parties (their partners), offer conditions, our advice and then click Make offer.<br /> <br /> == Letter selection ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Due to the Make Offer being the same for Rental and Sales, Standout has two master letters aimed at Make Rental and Make Sales. Each one can be customised. Select Make Rental. Choose your letter format (Document/Email/Both).<br /> <br /> == Accepting an offer ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Depending on what your landlord says, you can Reject an offer, however, for this document we will be accepting the offer to proceed further.<br /> <br /> <br /> Click the “Accept” text and then click Ok to the popup confirmation.<br /> <br /> == Letter Production ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Letter production uses the “Offer Accepted” letter and will allow you to create a letter to all tenants and landlords, with the standard options to Document/Email/Both.<br /> <br /> == Property Status ==<br /> <br /> <br /> When accepting the above, the property Status will change to “Application Made”, options available are “On Hold/Available/Application Made/Let/Withdrawn”.<br /> <br /> == Creating an Agreement ==<br /> Once you’ve completed your due diligence (credit checking, money laundering etc) and are ready to create the agreement, edit the property and choose the Rental Agreements button.<br /> <br /> <br /> For a new property, there will be no agreements, but as you let and re-let a property, a history of agreements will be displayed at the top.<br /> <br /> <br /> By default the agreement will be created for the tenant that you accepted with their offer.<br /> <br /> <br /> You will then be able to create the Agreement details:<br /> <br /> <br /> Agreement date                                  The date of the agreement (usual todays date)<br /> <br /> Reference                                           The reference you give to your agreement for this Property/tenant/landlord<br /> <br /> Let period                                           How often is rent due<br /> <br /> Initial period (Monthly)                      How long will the agreement be in place (12 = one year)<br /> <br /> Start date                                            When will the tenant move in<br /> <br /> End date                                              Usually calculated using Start date and Initial period<br /> <br /> Rolling contract                                  Will the tenancy agreement stay in place after the End date<br /> <br /> Auto Update Tenancy Address           Do you want Standout to replace the address held on the tenant details with this property address<br /> <br /> Let price                                              How much rent for each period<br /> <br /> Bond price                                          How much is required for bond (deposit)<br /> <br /> Finders Fee                                         How much is the landlord paying for your agency for finding a new tenant<br /> <br /> First Payment Due                              When is the first payment due (then occurs on that day each period<br /> <br /> Payment Terms                                   Zero by default, meaning if a payment is not received on the day specified, it’s overdue<br /> <br /> Days to pay landlord                           2 by default. How many days after receiving payment, will the landlord expect payment from your agency<br /> <br /> Send a reminder                                 How many days prior to rent being due, Standout can send an email and/or sms reminding the tenant<br /> <br /> Send reminder by                               Disabled by default, select from the options available.<br /> <br />                                                            Note: SMS requires your account to be in credit, see Adminstration/SMS<br /> <br /> Tenancy Deposit Scheme                   Which TDS provider you use<br /> <br /> Deposit Scheme Reference                The reference number for this agreement<br /> <br /> Additional Clauses                              Any additional clauses to this agreement, that differ from your standard agreement<br /> <br /> Initial Inspection visit                          If someone from your agency is to visit the property, choose a date and staff member<br /> <br /> Guarantor                                           If the tenant provides a guarantor, choose them<br /> <br /> Fee details                                           The fee is taken from the previous settings but if you wish to change, then enter a new fee, select the type and when the fee is due.<br /> <br /> == Letter production ==<br /> Standout will now create the Agreement Tenancy, populated with all the information entered in your agreement. You may amend this document prior to creating a Document/Emailing or Both.<br /> <br /> <br /> You will be returned to the property agreement screen, now a new tab will be displayed called “Financials”.<br /> <br /> == How to recover from creating an incorrect agreement ==<br /> Should you make an error with an agreement, you can perform one of two actions, End Agreement will end the agreement, leaving the agreement in your property/agreements history. Alternatively, if this agreement is no longer required or you do not wish for it to display, click “Delete Agreement” to remove it completely.<br /> <br /> == Meter readings ==<br /> Standout can store the meter readings for the start and end of the tenancy, these can either be obtained by a staff member visit or the tenant relaying them to you, along with the providers.<br /> <br /> == Financials ==<br /> This tab will display three additional tabs:<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> Figures            in a spreadsheet type format, all the transactions associated with this agreement.<br /> <br />            Breakdown      This breakdown counts and sums the various payment types. Note that any discrepancy shown may be due to a pending landlord payment, and will disappear when financials are up to date.<br /> <br />            Graph              This graph will allow you to more easily see any irregularities with the transactions for this agreement.<br /> <br /> === Figures ===<br /> The first section shows an overview of the following information:<br /> <br /> <br />            Tenant owes you<br /> <br />            Landlord owes you<br /> <br />            Total agency earnings (excludes bank charges and VAT)<br /> <br />            Total landlord payments<br /> <br /> === Generating a statement for your landlord ===<br /> When your landlord requests a statement, you can quickly and easily create one from here. Choose the Start date, End date or choose one of the Date helpers from the drop-down list and click Generate Statement.<br /> <br /> ==== Report details ====<br /> You will be shown the following columns:<br /> <br /> <br />            Date<br /> <br />            Description<br /> <br />            Reference<br /> <br />            Status<br /> <br />            Fee<br /> <br />            Amount<br /> <br /> ==== Output options ====<br /> Two options are then available to you are:<br /> <br /> <br />            Download Statement             downloads a copy for you in PDF format<br /> <br />            Email PDF to contact              emails a copy to the landlord (subject to an email address being stored)<br /> <br /> == Record payment ==<br /> When you either send or receive a payment, you record that payment in this section. Standout where relevant, will automatically assign the payment to any partial or unpaid items.<br /> <br /> <br /> The entry details are:<br /> <br /> <br />            Direction                     is the payment From or To<br /> <br />            Party                           who is the payment from/to<br /> <br />            Payment method        how did they pay?<br /> <br />            Payment type             Is the payment Rent/Other/Bond<br /> <br />            Amount                       How much is the payment<br /> <br />            Date                            What date is on your bank statement<br /> <br />            Reference                   What is the reference on your bank statement<br /> <br />            Description                 Any additional information you wish to record<br /> <br /> <br /> Click the Save button to confirm the above details.<br /> <br /> === Example: ===<br /> An agreement created on the 13/10/2021, tenancy starting 15/10/2021, Bond of £495.00, Monthly rent of £595.00 with a Finder’s fee of £125.00 (plus VAT – if applicable) and monthly management fees of £60.00 (plus VAT – if applicable).<br /> <br /> <br /> How to allocate the first month’s payments from the tenant and paying the landlord on the next working day.<br /> <br /> ==== Entering payments ====<br /> At the start of a tenancy, subject to a reliable tenant, you should enter the following details of payments from the tenant and payment to your landlord:<br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |Direction<br /> |From<br /> |Method<br /> |Type<br /> |Amount<br /> |Date<br /> |Ref<br /> |Description<br /> |-<br /> |From<br /> |Tenant<br /> |Bacs<br /> |Bond<br /> |495.00<br /> |14/10/2021<br /> |ABC123<br /> |Payment from Tenant<br /> |-<br /> |From<br /> |Tenant<br /> |Bacs<br /> |Rent<br /> |595.00<br /> |15/10/2021<br /> |ABC123<br /> |Payment from Tenant<br /> |-<br /> |To<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Bacs<br /> |Rent<br /> |373.00<br /> |18/10/2021<br /> |LL-001<br /> |Payment to Landlord – Rent minus fees<br /> |}<br /> <br /> <br /> When you enter the first months rent payment, Standout will allocate the Rent Due transaction paid, it will also mark the Invoice to landlord paid, if there is an Invoice to landlord for the Finders fee, it will take that into account, therefore, prior to your final entry above, the transactions should display as:-<br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |Date<br /> |Description<br /> |Status<br /> |Fee<br /> |Amount<br /> |Tenant Balance<br /> |-<br /> |15/10/21<br /> |Payment from Tenant<br /> |OK<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£595.00<br /> |£0.00<br /> |-<br /> |15/10/21<br /> |Invoice to landlord<br /> <br /> Management Fee<br /> |Paid<br /> |£60.00<br /> <br /> plus VAT of £12.00<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£595.00<br /> |-<br /> |15/10/21<br /> |Rent Due<br /> |Paid<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£595.00<br /> |&lt;nowiki&gt;-£595.00&lt;/nowiki&gt;<br /> |-<br /> |14/10/21<br /> |Payment for Bond<br /> |OK<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£495.00<br /> |£0.00<br /> |-<br /> |13/10/21<br /> |Bond request<br /> |Paid<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£495.00<br /> |&lt;nowiki&gt;-£495.00&lt;/nowiki&gt;<br /> |-<br /> |13/10/21<br /> |Invoice to landlord<br /> <br /> Finder’s fee<br /> |Unpaid<br /> |£125.00<br /> <br /> plus VAT of £25.00<br /> |£0.00<br /> |£0.00<br /> |}<br /> <br /> <br /> On Monday 18&lt;sup&gt;th&lt;/sup&gt;, you pay your landlord the above amount, record it with:<br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |Direction<br /> |From<br /> |Method<br /> |Type<br /> |Amount<br /> |Date<br /> |Ref<br /> |Description<br /> |-<br /> |To<br /> |Landlord<br /> |Bacs<br /> |Rent<br /> |373.00<br /> |18/10/2021<br /> |LL-001<br /> |Payment to Landlord – Rent minus fees<br /> |}<br /> <br /> <br /> As of the 18-10-2021, the balances would be:<br /> <br /> <br />            Tenant owes £0.00<br /> <br />            Landlord is owed £0.00<br /> <br />            Total agency fees £185.00 (excluding bank charges and VAT)<br /> <br />            Total Landlord payments = £373.00<br /> <br /> ==== Manually marking payments ====<br /> If you have a transaction that has not been automatically allocated AND all the balances are £0.00, choose the Actions button, then select “Mark as paid”. This will mark this transaction as paid.<br /> <br /> === Viewing options ===<br /> You can choose to either display or not display the following transactions:<br /> <br /> ==== Landlord / Tenant ====<br />                        From<br /> <br />                        To<br /> <br />                        Charges<br /> <br />                        Rent<br /> <br />                        All or None<br /> <br /> === Transactions list ===<br /> All the transactions listed with the following information:<br /> <br /> <br />            Date                            Transaction date<br /> <br />            Description                 A description of the transaction<br /> <br />            Status                          Payment status<br /> <br />            Fee                              If the transaction is a fee, with a description (if any) displayed below.<br /> <br />            Amount                       Amount of the transaction (if not a fee)<br /> <br />            Tenant Balance           Rolling figure of the amount owed by a Tenant<br /> <br /> === Actions ===<br />            Mark Paid                    If the transaction has been paid but showing unpaid, use this.<br /> <br />            Dispute                        Mark the transaction in dispute<br /> <br />            Print invoice                Only shown on Invoices, creates a Letter based on Landlord<br /> <br /> Invoice or Tenant Invoice<br /> <br />            Delete                         Delete the transaction if it is an error<br /> <br /> === Breakdown ===<br /> This breakdown counts and sums the various payment types. Note that any discrepancy shown may be due to a pending landlord payment and will disappear when financials are up to date.<br /> <br /> <br /> The information show is:<br /> <br /> <br />            Type                            The transaction type<br /> <br />            Count                          How many of these transactions<br /> <br />            Sum                             A total of these transactions<br /> <br />            Expected                     What is expected (if anything)<br /> <br />            Difference                   What the difference is (if shown)<br /> <br /> ==== Graph ====<br /> The graph is designed to allow you to see any irregularities more easily with the transactions for this agreement.<br /> <br /> === Diary – Rent reminders ===<br /> Once an agreement is in place and started, Standout will automatically place an all day event reminder in your diary, on the day rents are due. If you open the appointment, you can quickly jump to property/contact/agreement as these will be displayed.<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout creates these reminders monthly on the last day of a month/first day of the month, for that month.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=548 2021-11-25T15:29:26Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Office 365 Integration */</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 365, they will have the appointment created automatically.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Standout_-_Quick_Start&diff=547 2021-11-25T14:07:36Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Dashboard */ Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>&lt;h1&gt;Accessing Standout Property Manager&lt;/h1&gt; <br /> <br /> To access Standout Property Manager, it’s best to use an up to date web browser. We suggest Chrome, but all modern browsers should work without issue. However, we do not recommend older Internet Explorer browsers as this application can be problematic. <br /> <br /> Enter the following URL to gain access to Standout Property Manager:<br /> <br /> &lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.standoutpropertymanager.co.uk/login&lt;/nowiki&gt; <br /> <br /> We would suggest bookmarking the above link in your browser for easy access. <br /> <br /> =Logging into Standout Property Manager= <br /> <br /> You should be presented with the systems login page, which looks like: <br /> [[File:Login Form.png|none|thumb|587x587px]] <br /> <br /> The above is a snippet from the login page, to proceed you’ll need to know the Client ID which is the same for all users in your company and your individual Username, every user in Standout Property Manager must use their own Username and should never share passwords. <br /> <br /> If you’ve forgotten your password, you can click on the wording “click here” to then reset your password. <br /> <br /> Whilst using Standout Property Manager, should you require help or information, please do not hesitate to send an email to our Support Team. The email address is support@issl.co.uk and a support ticket will be opened in our Technical Support Online System where one of our technicians will contact you in due course. <br /> <br /> Click Continue. <br /> [[File:Login Password.png|none|thumb|500x500px]] <br /> <br /> Enter your password and then click Log in. <br /> <br /> ==2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Factor Authentication== <br /> <br /> If 2nd factor authentication is enabled on your account you will need to enter the 6-digit code to proceed, you will need your smart phone at this point. 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; Factor Authentication is an advanced security system that prevents access to your account unless you have the time limited code.<br /> <br /> Google Authenticator is available in both Google Play Store and Apple App Store.<br /> <br /> 2nd factor authentication is enabled in your [[Profile Configuration]]<br /> <br /> =Dashboard=<br /> [[File:New Dashboard.png|alt=|thumb|1300x1300px|none]]<br /> The [[The Dashboard|Dashboard]] is the default screen and where will come back to. There are six parts to this screen. <br /> <br /> Dashboard options run down the left side<br /> <br /> Status Bar – runs across the top <br /> <br /> Office 365 - a new button near the top left of the screen will allow you to link Standout to Office 365. Appointments created in Standout when you are logged in, will automatically be created (or updated) in your Outlook Calendar. Please note: do NOT edit appointments created by Standout in Outlook, always edit in Standout so that these appointments are automatically updated in Outlook Calendar. <br /> <br /> ==Dashboard quick views== <br /> <br /> Business Overview – shows relevant information regarding your properties. These will appear as more data is entered into the system <br /> <br /> Your recently edited listings <br /> <br /> Today’s appointments and Tasks <br /> <br /> Your recently edited contacts <br /> <br /> ===Performance chart=== <br /> <br /> This will show you all the properties that have a status of Sales Completed / Rentals Let / Withdrawn <br /> [[File:Performance.png|none|thumb|600x600px]] <br /> <br /> ===Local weather=== <br /> <br /> This will show a 7 day weather forecast at your office town. You can then change this for a postcode or town of your choice. This has been added to allow you to check the weather when photographing a property and choose the potential best day for outside photographs. <br /> [[File:Weather.png|none|thumb|900x900px]] <br /> <br /> ==Dashboard options== <br /> <br /> Tawk to                       integrated web chat client Tawk To – allows agents to chat with website users visiting your website (when implemented)<br /> <br /> Diary                            an internal diary to store all appointments and diarised items <br /> <br /> ===Properties=== <br /> <br /> Add property              add a new property onto the system<br /> <br /> Property List               list all properties on the system with a given criteria<br /> <br /> Progress                      list all properties with progress markers against them <br /> <br /> ===Rental=== <br /> <br /> Bulk rental payments  enter daily payments for rental payments<br /> <br /> Tenant list                   show all tenants (with active tenancy agreements)<br /> <br /> Landlord list                show all landlords (with active tenancy agreements) <br /> <br /> ===Businesses=== <br /> <br /> Add Business               should you sell businesses, enter these in this section<br /> <br /> Business list                list all businesses on the system with a given criteria <br /> <br /> ===Contacts=== <br /> <br /> Add contact                add a new contact onto the system<br /> <br /> Contact list                  list all contacts on the system with a given criteria<br /> <br /> Contacts to delete      list all contacts that you are able to remove from the system<br /> <br /> Hot contacts               those contacts that you deem to be a hot contact <br /> <br /> Reports                       various reports that extract data from the system to either Spreadsheet or PDF.<br /> <br /> Holiday Requests        those users that are able to approve or deny holiday requests will<br /> <br />                                    See this option appear once staff members place a holiday request. <br /> <br /> Administration             all the administration options to configure your agency, branches, staff and various other options<br /> <br /> ==Status bar== <br /> <br /> Version                        the systems version number, by clicking this option, shows you all the versions and improvements.<br /> <br /> Notifications                a quick view of all the system notifications, including diary appointments.<br /> <br /> Page help                    throughout the system, clicking this should show help information regarding the section that you’re working on.<br /> <br /> Colleagues                   shows colleagues that are logged onto the system <br /> <br /> Your name                   clicking this gives access for editing your profile (opens in a new tab) <br /> <br /> Log Out                       when you finish using the system, then log out for security <br /> <br /> Sticky Notes                create a post-it note type note on your desktop for reminders etc You can also create and store sticky notes in contacts and properties Within the notes tab.<br /> <br /> ==Business overview== <br /> <br /> The Business Overview contains useful information at a glance, such as how many new clients have been entered this week, whether feedback has been received and relayed to vendors, and whether there are any contacts with bounced emails (which is where an email sent by Stand Out Property Manager has been rejected, which is likely due to an invalid email address).<br /> <br /> Examples are<br /> <br />                                    Available sales<br /> <br />                                    Available rentals<br /> <br /> listings awaiting decision<br /> <br />                                    listings with no viewings in the last 30 days<br /> <br />                                    Agent awaiting viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Vendors/Landlords awaiting viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Contacts with bounced emails <br /> <br /> ===Your recently edited listings === <br /> <br /> This section shows a list of properties you’ve recently edited, showing their contract, address, status. <br /> <br /> === Your recently edited contacts=== <br /> <br /> This section shows a list of recent contacts and their definition on the system. <br /> <br /> ===Today’s appointments=== <br /> <br /> Shows appointments for yourself, and teams that you are assigned to. <br /> <br /> ===Version Control – Important Note=== <br /> <br /> As versions are implemented regularly (usually monthly), we do recommend that you read the release notes. The version will flash until you click on it but is important to view this information as if you have recommended a system change or improvement, will let you know what has been released. <br /> <br /> ===Notifications===<br /> [[File:Notification Window.png|thumb|alt=|none]]<br /> When you have notifications a “pill” will appear with the number of notifications, if you wish to delete them, simply hover over it and click on the x for it to be permanently deleted.<br /> ===Page Help ===<br /> [[File:PageHelp.png|none|thumb]]<br /> Throughout Standout, each page has its own page help to assist with you when completing the entries on that page. <br /> <br /> ===Colleagues – sending quick messages===<br /> [[File:Picture 2.png|none|thumb]]<br /> Standout has the ability to send notes to other members of your branch, by clicking on the staff member you will see: <br /> <br /> {| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;<br /> |Sending a note:<br /> | Receiving a note:<br /> |-<br /> |[[File:Send Note.png|thumb]]<br /> |[[File:Receive Note.png|thumb]]<br /> |}<br /> <br /> =Getting Started with your Clients = <br /> <br /> When you have a new client, this section will advise on the processes to follow for the following:<br /> <br />                        Selling a Property<br /> <br />                        Buying a Property<br /> <br />                        Letting a Property<br /> <br />                        Renting a Property <br /> <br /> ==Selling a Property (Vendor)== <br /> <br /> When a client wishes to use your services to sell their property, we recommend the following:<br /> <br />                                    Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage<br /> <br />                                    Enter the contact – link to the property<br /> <br />                                    Book Valuation appointment<br /> <br />                                    Enter property details, photos and valuation<br /> <br />                                    Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)<br /> <br />                                    &#039;&#039;See below (Buying a Property)&#039;&#039; <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates. <br /> <br /> ==Buying a Property (Purchaser)==<br /> <br />                                    Enter contact details<br /> <br />                                    Book viewing<br /> <br />                                    Update system with viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted<br /> <br />                                    Accept offer<br /> <br />                                    Send contracts<br /> <br />                                    Finialise the Sale (SSTC)<br /> <br />                                    Completed – once everything has been exchanged <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates.<br /> <br /> == Letting a Property (Landlord)== <br /> <br /> When a client wishes to use your services to let their property, we recommend the following:<br /> <br />                                    Enter the property – Pre-Valuation stage<br /> <br />                                                Management option:<br /> <br />                                                            No – client only uses you to obtain a tenant<br /> <br />                                                            Rent collection – you collect the rent on behalf of the Landlord<br /> <br /> Yes – you look after the property on behalf of the Landlord and are responsible for all agreed arrangement.<br /> <br />                                    Enter the contact – link to the property<br /> <br />                                    Book Valuation appointment<br /> <br />                                    Enter property details, photos and valuation<br /> <br />                                    Once accepted, place property as Available (on website/portals)<br /> <br />                                    &#039;&#039;See below (Letting a Property)&#039;&#039; <br /> <br /> During each stage Standout will allow you: <br /> <br /> Create advertising brochures for your window, hand out to clients or email as a PDF attachment.<br /> <br /> Create Letters/Documents for clients, solicitors, contractors. Every Letter can be modified for your agency, this is all within the Administration/Letter Templates. <br /> <br /> ==Renting a Property (Applicant/Tenant)==<br /> <br />                                    Enter contact details<br /> <br />                                    Book viewing<br /> <br />                                    Update system with viewing feedback<br /> <br />                                    Place and offer – Repeat if offer isn’t accepted<br /> <br />                                    Accept offer<br /> <br />                                    Create Rental Agreement<br /> <br />                                    Finialise the Letting (Let)<br /> <br />                                    Use Bulk Payments or the Financials Tab within a Property/Rental Agreement<br /> <br /> ==Additional Contacts== <br /> <br /> Standout can also help with the following additional contacts:<br /> <br />                        Solicitors<br /> <br />                        Contractors<br /> <br />                        Rental Guarantor<br /> <br />            <br /> <br /> ==Getting started==<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings|Configuration settings list]]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ|MediaWiki FAQ]]<br /> *[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources|Localise MediaWiki for your language]]<br /> *[[mediawikiwiki:Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam|Learn how to combat spam on your wiki]]</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=546 2021-11-25T14:05:07Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Office 365 Integration */</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date. Any appointment created by yourself will be created in your Outlook Calendar, if you&#039;ve created an appointment for a colleague, and they use Office 465, they will have the appointment created automatically.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Diary_Overview&diff=545 2021-11-25T13:59:27Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: Added Office 365 integration information</p> <hr /> <div>== Office 365 Integration ==<br /> If you have logged into Office 365 (by clicking the login button on your Dashboard) you will see &quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Appointments will be also created in your Office 365 calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&quot; below the date.<br /> <br /> == Diary actions ==<br /> [[File:Diary Actions.png|none|thumb|370x370px]]<br /> Download this week for Outlook / Calendar  download a file to import into another Calender<br /> <br /> Print this week                                                print weekly diary appointments<br /> <br /> Print today                                                      print todays appointments<br /> <br /> Print today (with directions)                          print todays appointments with directions to appointments and/or viewings<br /> <br /> Upload .ics file                                                import appointments from a different Calendar<br /> <br /> == Diary viewing options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryViewings.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Day/Week                   viewing options<br /> <br /> &lt;- Today -&gt;                  move back and forward in diary view, reset view to today<br /> <br /> (7) Next 7 days            jump 7 days from the selected day<br /> <br /> <br /> == Options ==<br /> [[File:DiaryOptions.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> Include unaccompanied viewings      show those viewings where no staff are accompanying<br /> <br /> Include deleted                                   show deleted appointments/entries<br /> <br /> <br /> Username dropdown                         select yourself, other or teams to view their appointments<br /> [[File:Diary2.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> + New              create a new appointment<br /> <br /> Padlock           Mark as Private – only you and the recipient will only be able to see the details<br /> <br /> (?)                    Mark as Tentative<br /> <br /> <br /> Edit / View      open the highlighted appointment<br /> <br /> == Add an appointment ==<br /> [[File:AddAnAppointment.png|none|thumb|540x540px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Subject                        name of the appointment<br /> <br /> Location                      where is the location of the appointment<br /> <br /> Branch                         which branch does this appointment belong to<br /> <br /> For                               for which staff member<br /> <br /> Category                     category for the appointment (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Start Date                    on which date (or start date)<br /> <br /> Start Time                   what time is the appointment<br /> <br /> All Day                         if it is an all day event<br /> <br /> End Date                     on which date (or end date)<br /> <br /> End Time                     how long is the appointment for (configured in Administration/Diary)<br /> <br /> Recurring                    to create recurring events, will be available when the category is set to Uncategorised or Personal<br /> <br /> Reminder                    do you want to be reminded about this appointment<br /> <br /> Notes                          additional notes regarding the appointment<br /> <br /> Private                         is this appointment private<br /> <br /> Tentative                     is this appointment tentative<br /> <br /> Close                           close the appointment without saving<br /> <br /> Create appointment   save the appointment into the Calendar<br /> <br /> == Creating a Valuation Appointment ==<br /> <br /> <br /> Open a property that is at Pre Valuation to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book Valuation. You will automatically be transferred to the Diary, double click on the day/time that you have booked<br /> [[File:Valuation.png|none|thumb|453x453px]]<br /> Standout will populate the appointment, if you require no changes, click Create appointment. You can tick the “Email owner” and the owner will be notified by email about the appointment. Alternatively, you can select a Valuation Letter and either send that in the post or email.<br /> <br /> <br /> Default letters are<br /> <br /> <br /> Potential Listing Sheet                        Valuation Pre Marketing Sheet<br /> <br /> Rental Take On/Valuation Checklist   Before start of rental checklist<br /> <br /> Valuation Appointment                      Book Valuation Letter<br /> <br /> <br /> Any of the above letters may be chosen and either downloaded to print from Word or emailed.<br /> [[File:AppEmail.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> If you have SMS credits, 2 hours before an appointment, if configured, reminders are sent automatically.<br /> <br /> == Book a viewing ==<br /> Open a property that is Available to create the appointment, once open, click “More actions then Book viewing<br /> [[File:BookAViewing.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> If you have not entered the potential buyer, at this point you can create a new contact (opens in a new browser tab to allow you to enter their details)<br /> <br /> <br /> Once you start to enter their name, they will appear where you can then click on them, then click Book viewing<br /> <br /> <br /> Again, double click on the date/time for the appointment<br /> [[File:ViewingAppt.png|none|thumb|357x357px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> Standout will populate the appointment, there will place ticks in both Email owner and Email viewer – you can untick if you do not wish to email either party. If either of the contacts have already confirmed this appointment, you can tick those. Click Create appointment. In Property and then Viewings / offers tab the appointment will show<br /> [[File:DiaryView.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]<br /> <br /> <br /> In the diary, the appointment will show as<br /> [[File:DiaryView2.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> Standout will add appointments to remind you in the Notifications at the top of the screen<br /> [[File:AppNotification.png|none|thumb|468x468px]]<br /> You can just hover over the past notifications to remove them, once completed.</div>

Carl.Ogden https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&diff=544 2021-11-25T13:55:59Z

<p>Carl.Ogden: /* Main area */ added Office 365 integration</p> <hr /> <div>= What is the Dashboard? =<br /> The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> At the top of your browser, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Toolbar&#039;&#039;&#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.<br /> [[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]<br /> <br /> A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-<br /> <br /> ==== Version x.x.x What’s New? ====<br /> Displays the current version of Standout. When a new version is released, the first screen displayed when you log in will be the release notes. This screen does display important information that you should really read. If you want to re-read these notes, click this option to display the release notes (this opens in the new browser tab), close the tab when you’ve finished.<br /> <br /> ==== Notifications ====<br /> [[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.<br /> <br /> ==== Page Help ====<br /> Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.<br /> <br /> ==== Colleagues ====<br /> [[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-<br /> [[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-<br /> <br /> On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-<br /> [[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-<br /> [[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> ==== Editing your profile ====<br /> If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-<br /> [[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]<br /> <br /> Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.<br /> <br /> ==== Log Out ====<br /> This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.<br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.<br /> <br /> ==== Logo Area ====<br /> The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.<br /> <br /> ==== Quick Search ====<br /> The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.<br /> <br /> ==== Dashboard ====<br /> Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.<br /> <br /> ===== Tawk To =====<br /> <br /> === Diary ===<br /> <br /> ==== Task list ====<br /> <br /> === Properties ===<br /> <br /> ==== Telephone wizard ====<br /> <br /> ==== Add property ====<br /> <br /> ==== Property list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Progress ====<br /> <br /> === Rental ===<br /> <br /> ==== Bulk rental payments ====<br /> <br /> ==== Tenant list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Landlord list ====<br /> <br /> === Contacts ===<br /> <br /> ==== Add contact ====<br /> <br /> ==== Contact list ====<br /> <br /> ==== Contacts to delete ====<br /> <br /> ==== Hot contacts ====<br /> Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts<br /> <br /> === Reports ===<br /> <br /> === Online Manuals ===<br /> You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.<br /> <br /> === Administration ===<br /> <br /> == &#039;&#039;&#039;Main area&#039;&#039;&#039; ==<br /> <br /> ==== Office 365 Integration ====<br /> When you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link Standout to your Office 365 account. This will allow appointments to be created in Standout AND in your Outlook Calendar. When you log in, Standout will synchronise appointments (both new and existing future appointments) into your Outlook calendar. If you wish to change an appointment, you must edit them in Standout and NOT Outlook so that synchronisation occurs. <br /> <br /> ==== Your recently edited listings ====<br /> This area displays properties that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the main photo, the property reference, contract, status, price, display address, quick link to edit, if a rental a quick link to the Agreements.<br /> <br /> To the right there are quick links to display All properties and/or All businesses. <br /> <br /> ==== Your recently edited contacts ====<br /> This area displays the contacts that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the contact Title, First and Surname and what they are (e.g. Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, Solicitor). To the right is a quick link to edit their details.<br /> <br /> To the right there are quick links to display All contacts.<br /> <br /> ==== Today&#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====<br /> This area displays appointments and tasks that are assigned to you. By clicking on them, you will be taken to the Diary where the item will be displayed, allowing you to view, or if required, update the details.<br /> <br /> To the right, View diary will take you to the Diary for today. Clicking “Create a task” will allow you to create a new task.<br /> <br /> ==== Performance Chart ====<br /> This area displays those properties that have been Let/Completed/Withdrawn over the last twelve months. An informational display to display how successful your agency has been.<br /> <br /> ==== Local weather ====<br /> This area displays the local weather based on town/postcode information provided in your branch configuration. The data displayed will be for the current day and the next seven days. If you want to view a different area, enter a postcode or town to be displayed. This area is displayed to assist in photographing a property, blue skies promote a property far greater than wet days – not that we’re able to change the weather!</div>

Carl.Ogden